eos 600d instruction manual en

INS

TR

UC

TIO

N M

AN

UA

L

The “Software Start Guide” and “Quick Reference Guide” are

provided at end of this manual.

INSTRUCTIONMANUAL

ENGLISH

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2

The EOS 600D is a high-performance, digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 18.0 effective megapixels, DIGIC 4, high-precision and high-speed 9-point AF, approx. 3.7 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, and Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting.The camera is highly responsive for shooting at anytime, provides many functions fitted for advanced shooting, and offers many other features.

Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the CameraWith a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come out. You can then better understand the camera.To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety Warnings” (p.297, 298) and “Handling Precautions” (p.14, 15).

Testing the Camera Before Use and LiabilityAfter shooting, playback and check whether the images have been properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

CopyrightsCopyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.

Introduction

This camera is compatible with SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards. This manual will refer to all these cards as just “card.”* The camera does not come with a card for recording images.

Please purchase it separately.

www.devicemanuals.eu

mmediately view the image you have

www.devic

eman

uals.

eummediately view the image you have

captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucaptured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come out. You can then better understand the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthey come out. You can then better understand the camera.

cidents, first read the “Safety

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucidents, first read the “Safety

Warnings” (p.297, 298) and “Handling Precautions” (p.14, 15).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Warnings” (p.297, 298) and “Handling Precautions” (p.14, 15).

Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Testing the Camera Before Use and LiabilityAfter shooting, playback and check whether the images have been

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After shooting, playback and check whether the images have been properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the


images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held liable for any lo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ss or inconvenience caused.

Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images or copyrighted music and imageswww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

images or copyrighted music and images

3

Before starting, check that all the following items have been included with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

* Battery Charger LC-E8 or LC-E8E is provided. (The LC-E8E comes with a power cord.)

If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lens is included.Depending on the Lens Kit type, the lens instruction manual might also be included.Be careful not to lose any of the above items.

Item Check List

Battery PackLP-E8

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger LC-E8/LC-E8E*

Interface cable Stereo AV CableAVC-DC400ST

Wide StrapEW-100DB III

Camera(with eyecup and body cap)

EOS Solution Disk(Software CD-ROM)

EOS Software Instruction Manuals

Disk(CD-ROM)

CameraInstruction Manual

(this booklet)

Windows XXX XXX

EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk XXX

Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX

© CANON INC. 20XX. Made in the EU.

EOS Solution Disk XXX

CEL-XXX XXX


Windows XXX XXXMac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

EOS Software Instruction Manuals DiskThe software Instruction Manuals are included on the CD-ROM as PDF files. See page 305 for instructions on using the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk.

Windows XXX XXX


Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX



Interface cable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Interface cable
















EOS Solution Disk

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EOS Solution Disk(Software CD-ROM)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Software CD-ROM)




4

Icons in this Manual<6> : Indicates the Main Dial.<V> : Indicates the <S> cross keys.<0> : Indicates the setting button.0, 9, 7, 8 : Indicates that the respective function remains

active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. respectively after you let go of the button.

* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials, and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the LCD monitor.

3 : Indicates a function which can be changed by pressing the <M> button and changing the setting.

M : If shown on the upper right of the page, it indicates that the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.22).

(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more information.: Tip or advice for better shooting.: Problem-solving advice.: Warning to prevent shooting problems.: Supplemental information.

Basic AssumptionsAll operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch has already been set to <1> (p.32).It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to the default.For explanatory purposes, the instructions show the camera attached with an EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II lens.

Conventions Used in this Manual


and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the

an be changed by pressing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euan be changed by pressing the > button and changing the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button and changing the setting.

: If shown on the upper right of the page, it indicates that the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: If shown on the upper right of the page, it indicates that the the Creative Zone modes (p.22).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the Creative Zone modes (p.22).(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more information.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more information.: Tip or advice for better shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Tip or advice for better shooting.: Problem-solving advice.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Problem-solving advice.


: Warning to prevent shooting problems.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Warning to prevent shooting problems.: Supplemental information.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Supplemental information.

Basic Assumptionswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Basic Assumptions

5

For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s basic operations and shooting procedures.

Chapters

Introduction 2

Getting Started 25

Basic Shooting and Image Playback 49

Creative Shooting 73

Advanced Shooting 93

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 123

Shooting Movies 141

Handy Features 165

Wireless Flash Photography 189

Image Playback 201

Post-Processing Images 229

Printing Images 235

Customizing the Camera 249

Reference 259

Software Start Guide 301

Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index 307

123456789101112131415


Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)

Wireless Flash Photography

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Image Playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image Playback







Post-Processing Imageswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Post-Processing Imageswww.devicemanuals.eu


6

Contents at a Glance

ShootingShoot automatically p.49 - 63 (Basic Zone modes)

Shoot continuously p.88 (i Continuous shooting)

Take a picture of yourself in a group p.89 (j Self-timer)

Freeze the action p.94 (s Shutter-priority AE)Blur the action

Blur the background p.56 (C Creative Auto)Keep the background in sharp focus p.96 (f Aperture-priority AE)

Adjust the image brightness (exposure) p.103 (Exposure compensation)

Shoot in low light p.50, 90 (D Flash photography)p.79 (ISO speed setting)

Shoot without flash p.55 (7 Flash Off)p.58, 64 (b Flash Off)

Photograph fireworks at night p.100 (Bulb exposure)

Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor p.124 (A Live View shooting)

Shoot movies p.141 (k Movie shooting)

Image QualityShoot with image effects p.81 (Selecting a Picture Style)matching the subject

Make a large-size print of the picture p.76 (73, 83, 1)


Shutter-priority AE)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Shutter-priority AE)


p.56

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup.56 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(C

www.devic

eman

uals.

euC Creative Auto)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Creative Auto)

p.96

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup.96 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(f

www.devic

eman

uals.

euf


Adjust the image brightness (exposure)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjust the image brightness (exposure)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.103

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.103


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




Photograph fireworks at night

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Photograph fireworks at night

Shoot while viewing the LCD monitorwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shoot while viewing the LCD monitorwww.devicemanuals.eu






7

Take many pictures p.76 (7a, 8a, b, c)

FocusingChange the point of focus p.85 (S AF point selection)

Shoot a moving subject p.62, 84 (AI Servo AF)

PlaybackView the images with the camera p.71 (x Playback)

Search for pictures quickly p.202 (H Index display)p.203 (I Image browsing)

Rate images p.206 (Ratings)

Prevent important images p.222 (K Image protect)from accidental deletion

Delete unnecessary images p.224 (L Delete)

Auto play images and movies p.215 (Slide show)

View the images or movies on a TV set p.218 (Video OUT)

Set the LCD monitor brightness p.167 (LCD monitor brightness)

PrintingPrint pictures easily p.235 (Direct printing)



p.71

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup.71 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(x

www.devic

eman

uals.

eux



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.202

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.202



Prevent important images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prevent important images from accidental deletion

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

from accidental deletion


Delete unnecessary images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Delete unnecessary images






Auto play images and movieswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto play images and movieswww.devicemanuals.eu

8

PowerBattery• Charging p.26• Installing/Removing p.28• Battery check p.33Power outlet p.260Auto power off p.32

CardInserting/Removing p.29Format p.45Release shutter without card p.166

LensAttaching/Detaching p.36Zoom p.37Image Stabilizer p.38

Basic SettingsDioptric adjustment p.39Language p.35Date/Time p.34Beeper p.166Using the LCD monitor p.31LCD Off/On p.179LCD brightness adjustment p.167

Recording ImagesCreate/select a folder p.168File No. p.170

Image QualityImage-recording quality p.76Picture Style p.81White balance p.117Color space p.121Image enhancement features• Auto Lighting Optimizer p.109• Lens peripheral

illumination correction p.110• Noise reduction

for long exposures p.253• Noise reduction

for high ISO speeds p.254• Highlight tone priority p.254

AFAF mode p.83AF point selection p.85Manual focusing p.87

DriveDrive modes p.20Continuous shooting p.88Self-timer p.89Maximum burst p.77

ShootingISO speed p.79Feature guide p.48Quick Control p.41Creative Auto p.56Program AE p.74Shutter-priority AE p.94Aperture-priority AE p.96Manual exposure p.99Bulb p.100

Index to Features









p.38

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.38

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


p.39

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.39

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• Noise reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• Noise reduction

for long exposures

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufor long exposures• Noise reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• Noise reduction for high ISO speeds

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufor high ISO speeds

• Highlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• Highlight tone priority

AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF point selection

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF point selection

9

Index to Features

Mirror lockup p.122Automatic Depth-of-field AE p.101Metering mode p.102Remote control p.261

Exposure AdjustmentsExposure compensation p.103AEB p.105AE lock p.107

FlashBuilt-in flash p.90• Flash exposure

compensation p.104• FE lock p.108External flash p.263Flash control p.180• Wireless flash p.189

Live View ShootingLive View shooting p.123Focusing p.131Aspect ratio p.129Grid display p.129Quick Control p.128

Shooting MoviesMovie shooting p.141Quick Control p.149Sound recording p.160Grid display p.161Video snapshot p.153Movie digital zoom p.152Manual exposure p.144

Image PlaybackImage review time p.166Single image display p.71• Shooting information

display p.226Index display p.202Image browsing (Jump display) p.203Magnify p.204Rotate p.205Ratings p.206Movie playback p.212Editing out movie’s first/last scene p.214Slide show p.215Viewing images on TV p.218Protect p.222Erase p.224Quick Control p.208

Image EditingCreative filters p.230Resize p.233

PrintingPictBridge p.235Print Order (DPOF) p.245

CustomizationCustom Functions (C.Fn) p.250My Menu p.258

SoftwareInstall p.303Software Instruction Manual p.305





p.263

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.263 p.180

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.180p.189

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.189

Live View shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Live View shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devicemanuals.euMovie playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovie playbackEditing out movie’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEditing out movie’s first/last scene

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufirst/last scene

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSlide show

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSlide show

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Viewing images on TV

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Viewing images on TV

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Protect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Protect

10

2

1

Introduction 2Item Check List.................................................................................................. 3Conventions Used in this Manual ...................................................................... 4Chapters............................................................................................................ 5Contents at a Glance......................................................................................... 6Index to Features .............................................................................................. 8Handling Precautions ...................................................................................... 14Quick Start Guide ............................................................................................ 16Nomenclature .................................................................................................. 18

Getting Started 25Charging the Battery ....................................................................................... 26Installing and Removing the Battery................................................................ 28Installing and Removing the Card ................................................................... 29Using the LCD Monitor .................................................................................... 31Turning on the Power ...................................................................................... 32Setting the Date and Time............................................................................... 34Selecting the Interface Language.................................................................... 35Attaching and Detaching a Lens ..................................................................... 36About the Lens Image Stabilizer...................................................................... 38Basic Operation............................................................................................... 39Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ........................................................ 413 Menu Operations................................................................................... 43Formatting the Card......................................................................................... 45Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................................. 47Feature Guide ................................................................................................. 48

Basic Shooting and Image Playback 49A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto).................................... 50A Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques.......................................... 537 Disabling Flash.......................................................................................... 55C Creative Auto Shooting ............................................................................. 562 Shooting Portraits....................................................................................... 593 Shooting Landscapes................................................................................ 604 Shooting Close-ups .................................................................................... 615 Shooting Moving Subjects......................................................................... 626 Shooting Portraits at Night ......................................................................... 63Q Quick Control ............................................................................................. 64Shoot by Ambience Selection.......................................................................... 65Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type .................................................................... 68x Image Playback......................................................................................... 71

Contents


Charging the Battery ....................................................................................... 26

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCharging the Battery ....................................................................................... 26Installing and Removing the Battery................................................................ 28

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInstalling and Removing the Battery................................................................ 28Installing and Removing the Card ................................................................... 29

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInstalling and Removing the Card ................................................................... 29Using the LCD Monitor .................................................................................... 31

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUsing the LCD Monitor .................................................................................... 31Turning on the Power ...................................................................................... 32

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTurning on the Power ...................................................................................... 32Setting the Date and Time............................................................................... 34

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSetting the Date and Time............................................................................... 34Selecting the Interface Language.................................................................... 35

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Selecting the Interface Language.................................................................... 35Attaching and Detaching a Lens ..................................................................... 36

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attaching and Detaching a Lens ..................................................................... 36About the Lens Image Stabilizer...................................................................... 38

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

About the Lens Image Stabilizer...................................................................... 38Basic Operation............................................................................................... 39

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Basic Operation............................................................................................... 39 Quick Control for Shooting Functions ........................................................ 41

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control for Shooting Functions ........................................................ 41 Menu Operations................................................................................... 43

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Menu Operations................................................................................... 43Formatting the Card......................................................................................... 45

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Formatting the Card......................................................................................... 45







Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................................. 47

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................................. 47Feature Guide ................................................................................................. 48

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Feature Guide ................................................................................................. 48

Basic Shooting and Image Playbackwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Basic Shooting and Image Playback Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto).................................... 50www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto).................................... 50

11

Contents

5

4

3 Creative Shooting 73d: Program AE................................................................................................74Setting the Image-recording Quality.................................................................76Z: Changing the ISO Speed .........................................................................79A Selecting the Subject’s Optimal Image Characteristics (Picture Style) ....81E: Changing the Autofocus Mode (AF Mode) ................................................83S Selecting the AF Point ...............................................................................85Subjects Difficult to Focus................................................................................87

MF: Manual Focusing ...................................................................................87i Continuous Shooting ..................................................................................88j Using the Self-timer ....................................................................................89D Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................90

Advanced Shooting 93s: Action Shots .............................................................................................94f: Changing the Depth of Field ....................................................................96

Depth of Field Preview..................................................................................98a: Manual Exposure.......................................................................................998: Automatic Depth-of-Field AE..............................................................101q Changing the Metering Mode...................................................................102O y Setting Exposure Compensation .....................................................103Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ...................................................................105A Locking the Exposure (AE Lock) ..............................................................107A Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock).....................................................108Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically (Auto Lighting Optimizer).......109Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners.............................................................110A Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) ................................112A Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)..................115B: Matching the Light Source (White Balance) ..........................................1172 Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source..........................................119Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space) ...................................121Mirror Lock-up to Reduce Camera Shake......................................................122

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 123A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ................................................................124Shooting Function Settings ............................................................................128z Menu Function Settings............................................................................129Changing the Autofocus Mode.......................................................................131MF: Focusing Manually ..................................................................................138





Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................90

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................90

: Action Shots .............................................................................................94

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Action Shots .............................................................................................94: Changing the Depth of Field ....................................................................96

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Changing the Depth of Field ....................................................................96

Depth of Field Preview..................................................................................98

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depth of Field Preview..................................................................................98: Manual Exposure.......................................................................................99

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Manual Exposure.......................................................................................99: Automatic Depth-of-Field AE..............................................................101

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Automatic Depth-of-Field AE..............................................................101 Changing the Metering Mode...................................................................102

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Changing the Metering Mode...................................................................102 Setting Exposure Compensation .....................................................103

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting Exposure Compensation .....................................................103Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ...................................................................105

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ...................................................................105 Locking the Exposure (AE Lock) ..............................................................107

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Locking the Exposure (AE Lock) ..............................................................107 Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock).....................................................108

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock).....................................................108Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically (Auto Lighting Optimizer)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically (Auto Lighting Optimizer)Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners.............................................................110

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners.............................................................110


Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) ................................112

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) ................................112 Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)..................115www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)..................115: Matching the Light Source (White Balance) ..........................................117www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

: Matching the Light Source (White Balance) ..........................................117

Contents

12

9

8

6

7

Shooting Movies 141k Shooting Movies...................................................................................... 142Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 149Setting the Movie-recording Size................................................................... 150Using Movie Digital Zoom.............................................................................. 152Taking Video Snapshots ............................................................................... 153Menu Function Settings................................................................................. 157

Handy Features 165Handy Features............................................................................................. 166

Silencing the Beeper .................................................................................. 166Card Reminder ........................................................................................... 166Setting the Image Review Time ................................................................. 166Setting the Auto Power-off Time................................................................. 167Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................................... 167Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................................. 168File Numbering Methods ............................................................................ 170Setting Copyright Information..................................................................... 172Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................................ 174C Checking Camera Settings ............................................................... 175Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................................ 176Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On................................................................. 179Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color........................................... 179

Setting the Flash ........................................................................................... 180f Automatic Sensor Cleaning.................................................................... 184Appending Dust Delete Data......................................................................... 185Manual Sensor Cleaning ............................................................................... 187

Wireless Flash Photography 189Using Wireless Flash..................................................................................... 190Easy Wireless Flash Shooting....................................................................... 191Custom Wireless Flash Shooting .................................................................. 194Other Settings ............................................................................................... 198

Image Playback 201H I Searching for Images Quickly............................................................. 202u/y Magnified View.................................................................................... 204b Rotating the Image................................................................................... 205Setting Ratings .............................................................................................. 206Q Quick Control During Playback................................................................ 208k Enjoying Movies ...................................................................................... 210


Card Reminder ........................................................................................... 166

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCard Reminder ........................................................................................... 166Setting the Image Review Time ................................................................. 166

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSetting the Image Review Time ................................................................. 166Setting the Auto Power-off Time................................................................. 167

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSetting the Auto Power-off Time................................................................. 167Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................................... 167

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................................... 167Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................................. 168

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCreating and Selecting a Folder................................................................. 168File Numbering Methods ............................................................................ 170

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

File Numbering Methods ............................................................................ 170Setting Copyright Information..................................................................... 172

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting Copyright Information..................................................................... 172Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................................ 174

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................................ 174 Checking Camera Settings ............................................................... 175

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Checking Camera Settings ............................................................... 175Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................................ 176

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................................ 176Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On................................................................. 179

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On................................................................. 179Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color........................................... 179

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color........................................... 179Setting the Flash ........................................................................................... 180

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Flash ........................................................................................... 180 Automatic Sensor Cleaning.................................................................... 184

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Automatic Sensor Cleaning.................................................................... 184




Appending Dust Delete Data......................................................................... 185

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Appending Dust Delete Data......................................................................... 185Manual Sensor Cleaning ............................................................................... 187

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Manual Sensor Cleaning ............................................................................... 187

Wireless Flash Photographywww.devic

eman

uals.

eu


13

Contents

12

13

14

15

11

10

k Playing Movies.........................................................................................212X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ...................................................214Slide Show (Auto Playback)...........................................................................215Viewing the Images on TV .............................................................................218K Protecting Images ....................................................................................222L Erasing Images .........................................................................................224C Shooting Information Display ................................................................226

Post-Processing Images 229U Creative Filters .........................................................................................230S Resize ......................................................................................................233

Printing Images 235Preparing to Print ...........................................................................................236wPrinting......................................................................................................238

Trimming the Image ....................................................................................243W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ...........................................................245W Direct Printing with DPOF ........................................................................248

Customizing the Camera 249Setting Custom Functions ..............................................................................250Custom Function Settings ..............................................................................252Registering My Menu .....................................................................................258

Reference 259Using a Household Power Outlet ...................................................................260Remote Control Shooting...............................................................................261External Speedlites ........................................................................................263Using Eye-Fi Cards ........................................................................................265Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes .............................268Menu Settings ................................................................................................270System Map ...................................................................................................276Troubleshooting Guide...................................................................................278Error Codes....................................................................................................287Specifications .................................................................................................288Safety Warnings.............................................................................................297

Software Start Guide 301Software Start Guide......................................................................................302

Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index 307Quick Reference Guide..................................................................................308Index ..............................................................................................................320






www.devicemanuals.euPreparing to Print ...........................................................................................236

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPreparing to Print ...........................................................................................236Printing......................................................................................................238

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPrinting......................................................................................................238Trimming the Image ....................................................................................243

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTrimming the Image ....................................................................................243 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ...........................................................245

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ...........................................................245 Direct Printing with DPOF ........................................................................248

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Direct Printing with DPOF ........................................................................248

Setting Custom Functions ..............................................................................250

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting Custom Functions ..............................................................................250Custom Function Settings ..............................................................................252

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom Function Settings ..............................................................................252






Registering My Menu .....................................................................................258

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Registering My Menu .....................................................................................258

Using a Household Power Outlet ...................................................................260

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using a Household Power Outlet ...................................................................260Remote Control Shooting...............................................................................261

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Remote Control Shooting...............................................................................261External Speedlites ........................................................................................263

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

External Speedlites ........................................................................................263


Using Eye-Fi Cards ........................................................................................265www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using Eye-Fi Cards ........................................................................................265Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes .............................268www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes .............................268

14

Camera CareThis camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult your nearest Canon Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself.Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation.If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has evaporated before using the camera.If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working.Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a darkroom or chemical lab.If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot coming up, have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.

Handling Precautions


Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDo not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to

he lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhe lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and

focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufocusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest

Do not touch the camera’s electrical co

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ntacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Corroded contacts can cause camera

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.If condensation forms on the camera, do

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If condensation forms on the camera, doavoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

avoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

and battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has

15

Handling Precautions

LCD MonitorAlthough the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there might be a few dead pixels among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels. Dead pixels displaying only black or red, etc., are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

CardsTo protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force, physical shock, or vibration.Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic.Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having static electricity.Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.Store the card in a case.Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

LensAfter detaching the lens from the camera, attach the lens caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Cautions During Prolonged UseIf you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. Although this is not a malfunction, holding the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin burns.

About smudges adhering to the front of the sensorBesides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. In case visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

Contactswww.devicemanuals.eu

might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumight look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDo not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

ntacts with your fingers or anything

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ntacts with your fingers or anything

Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet.

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.


Store the card in a case.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Store the card in a case.Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

After detaching the lens from the camera, attach the lens www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After detaching the lens from the camera, attach the lens caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid

16

Quick Start Guide

1 Insert the battery. (p.28)To charge the battery, see page 26.

2 Insert a card. (p.29)With the card’s label facing toward the camera back, insert it into the slot.

3 Attach the lens. (p.36)Align the lens’ white or red index with the camera’s index in the matching color.

4 Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF>. (p.36)

5 Set the power switch to <1>, and set the Mode Dial to <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto). (p.50)

All the necessary camera settings will be set automatically.

White index Red index



toward the camera back,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutoward the camera back, insert it into the slot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euinsert it into the slot.


Attach the lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attach the lens. Align the lens’ white or red index

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Align the lens’ white or red index with the camera’s index in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with the camera’s index in the matching color.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

matching color.

17

Quick Start Guide

6 Flip out the LCD monitor. (p.31)When the LCD monitor displays the date/time setting screen, see page 34.

7 Focus the subject. (p.40)Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject.Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus the subject.If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically.

8 Take the picture. (p.40)Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

9 Review the picture. (p.166)The captured image will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.To display the image again, press the <x> button (p.71).

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View Shooting” (p.123).To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.71).To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.224).



aim the viewfinder center over the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euaim the viewfinder center over the

Press the shutter button halfway,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand the camera will focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusubject.If necessary, the built-in flash will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

pop-up automatically.


Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.

18

The names in bold indicate the parts mentioned up until the “Basic Shooting and Image Playback” section.

Nomenclature

Remote control

terminal (p.262)

Audio/video OUT/

Digital terminal (p.221,236)

HDMI mini OUT

terminal (p.218)

External microphone IN terminal (p.160)

Hot shoe (p.263)

EF Lens mount index (p.36)

Grip

Remote controlsensor(p.122,261)

Flash-sync contacts

Shutter button

(p.40)

Lens lock pin

Lens mount

Contacts (p.15)

Depth-of-field preview

button (p.98)

Built-in flash/AF-assist beam

(p.90/86)

Red-eye reduction/Self-timer lamp (p.91/89)

Strap mount

(p.25)

Lens release button

(p.37)

Terminal coverMirror (p.122,187)

Mode Dial (p.22)

<D> Flash

button (p.90)

Microphone

(p.142)

<6> Main Dial

<Z> ISO speed

setting button (p.79)

EF-S Lens mount index (p.36)

Power switch (p.32)

<V> Focal plane

mark (p.61)

Body cap (p.36)

 Display button

(p.47,152,167,179)



www.devicemanuals.eu<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu<V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV

mark

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumark


















































Contacts www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Contacts

Mirror (p.122,187)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mirror (p.122,187)

19

Nomenclature

Tripod socketAccess lamp (p.30)

Battery compartment

cover release lever (p.28)

Battery compartment cover

(p.28)

<O> Aperture/

Exposure compensation

button (p.99/103)

Viewfinder eyepiece

Eyecup (p.262) Dioptric adjustment knob (p.39)

Card slot

cover (p.29)

Card slot (p.29)

LCD monitor

(p.31,43,167)

<A> Live View shooting/

Movie shooting button

(p.124/142)

<S/u>

AF point selection/

Magnify button

(p.85/204,243)

<A/I> AE lock/

FE lock button/

Index/Reduce button

(p.107/108/202/204,243)

<M> Menu

button (p.43)

<C> Info button

(p.47,71,126,146,175)

<x> Playback button (p.71)

<L> Erase button (p.224)<0> Setting button (p.43)

DC cord hole

(p.260)

Speaker

(p.212)

<Q/l> Quick Control button/

Direct print button (p.41/241)

<S> Cross keys (p.43)

<WB> White balance selection button (p.117)

<XA> Picture Style selection button (p.81)

<Yi/Q> Drive mode selection button (p.88,89)

<ZE> AF mode selection button (p.83)























































Tripod socket

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Tripod socket

AF point selection/

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF point selection/

Magnify button

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMagnify button

(p.85/204,243)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.85/204,243)

Quick Control buttonwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control button

Direct print button (p.41/241)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Direct print button (p.41/241)www.devicemanuals.eu

Nomenclature

20

Shooting Settings Display (in Creative Zone modes, p.22)

*1: Displayed when the built-in flash is popped up.*2: Displayed if an Eye-Fi card is used.The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Aperture

ISO speed (p.79)

Shutter speed

Shooting mode

White balance (p.117)

Q Auto

W Daylight

E Shade

R Cloudy

Y Tungsten light

U White fluorescent light

I Flash

O Custom

Exposure level indicator


amount (p.103)

AEB range (p.105)

Number of possible shots

Number of possible shots

during WB bracketing

Self-timer countdown

Metering mode (p.102)

q Evaluative metering

w Partial metering

r Spot metering

e Center-weighted average metering

Drive mode (p.88,89)

u Single shooting

i Continuous shooting

Q Self-timer:10 sec/Remote control

l Self-timer:2 sec

q Self-timer:Continuous

AF mode (p.83)

XOne-Shot AF

9AI Focus AF

ZAI Servo AF

gManual Focusing

Battery check (p.33)

zxcn

Eye-Fi transmission status*2 (p.265)

Picture Style (p.81)

Quick Control icon (p.41)

c Main Dial pointer (p.93)

Highlight tone priority

(p.254)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109)

Built-in flash

func. setting*1 (p.181)

2 White balance correction (p.119)

B White balance bracketing (p.120)

y Flash exposure

compensation (p.104)

0 External flash exposure compensation

Image-recording quality

(p.76)

73 Large/Fine

83 Large/Normal

74 Medium/Fine

84 Medium/Normal

7a Small 1/Fine

8a Small 1/Normal

b Small 2 (Fine)

c Small 3 (Fine)

1 RAW

1+73 RAW+Large/Finewww.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



















White fluorescent light

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

White fluorescent light

compensation (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucompensation (

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0 External flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu External flash exposure compensation

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexposure compensation

21

Nomenclature

Viewfinder Information

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Aperture

AF point activation indicator < >

AF points

<Z>ISO speed

<o> Focus

confirmation

light

Max. burst

<2>

White balance correction

ISO speed

<0> Monochrome shooting


Exposure compensation amount

AEB range

Red-eye reduction lamp-on indicator

Card full warning (FuLL)

Card error warning (Card)

No card warning (Card)

<A> AE lock/

AEB in-progress

<D> Flash-ready

Improper FE lock

warning

<e> High-speed sync

(FP flash)

<d> FE lock/

FEB in-progress

<y> Flash exposure

compensation

Shutter speed

FE lock (FEL)

Busy (buSY)

Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)

Focusing screen

Spot metering circle

<A> Highlight tone prioritywww.devicemanuals.eu
















































> High-speed sync www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> High-speed sync

Nomenclature

22

Mode DialThe Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes, Creative Zone modes, and the Movie shooting mode.

Basic ZoneAll you do is press the shutter button.The camera sets everything to suit the subject.

A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.50)7 : Flash Off (p.55)C : Creative Auto (p.56)

Creative ZoneThese modes give you more control for shooting various subjects.

d : Program AE (p.74)s : Shutter-priority AE (p.94)f : Aperture-priority AE (p.96)a : Manual exposure (p.99)8: Automatic depth-of-field AE

(p.101)

Image Zone

2 : Portrait (p.59)3 : Landscape (p.60)4 : Close-up (p.61)5 : Sports (p.62)6 : Night Portrait (p.63)

k: Movie shooting (p.141)
































All you do is press the shutter button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All you do is press the shutter button.The camera sets everything to suit the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The camera sets everything to suit the

Scene Intelligent Autowww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Scene Intelligent Auto (p.55)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

(p.55)www.devicemanuals.eu

23

Nomenclature

LensLens without a distance scale

Lens with a distance scale

Focus mode switch (p.36)

Lens mount index (p.36)

Contacts (p.15)

Hood mount (p.294)

Filter thread (front of lens) (p.294)

Focusing ring (p.87,138)

Zoom ring (p.37)

Zoom position index (p.37)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.38)

Focus mode switch (p.36)

Focusing ring (p.87,138)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.38)

Hood mount (p.294)

Filter thread (front of lens) (p.294)

Zoom ring (p.37)

Contacts (p.15)

Lens mount index (p.36)

Zoom position index (p.37)

Distance scalewww.devicemanuals.eu

























www.devic

eman

uals.

eu













(p.36)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.36)



Hood mount

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Hood mount


(p.294)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.294)

Nomenclature

24

Battery Charger LC-E8Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.26).

Battery Charger LC-E8ECharger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.26).

Battery pack slotPower plug

Charge lampFull-charge lamp

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Power cord

Power cord socket

Battery pack slot Charge lamp

Full-charge lamp

H104_HG_EN.book Monday, April 9, 2012 11:28 AM




Battery Charger LC-E8E

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Battery Charger LC-E8ECharger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.26).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.26).


IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.






Charge lamp www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Charge lamp

25

1Getting Started

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations.

Attaching the StrapPass the end of the strap through the camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.

The eyepiece cover is also attached to the strap (p.262).

Eyepiece cover


www.devicemanuals.euGetting Started

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGetting Started

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting and basic camera operations.

Attaching the Strap

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attaching the StrapPass the end of the strap through

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pass the end of the strap through the camera’s strap mount eyelet

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera’s strap mount eyelet

















26

1 Remove the protective cover.Detach the protective cover provided with the battery.

2 Attach the battery.As shown in the illustration, attach the battery securely to the charger.To detach the battery, follow the above procedure in reverse.

3 Recharge the battery.For LC-E8

As shown by the arrow, flip out the battery charger’s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet.

For LC-E8EConnect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into the power outlet.

Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp turns orange.When the battery is fully recharged, the full-charge lamp will turn green.

It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at 23°C / 73°F. The time required to recharge the battery depends on the ambient temperature and the battery’s charge level.For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (6°C - 10°C / 43°F - 50°F) will take a longer time (up to 4 hours).

Charging the Battery

LC-E8

LC-E8E


To detach the battery, follow the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo detach the battery, follow the above procedure in reverse.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euabove procedure in reverse.

Recharge the battery.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRecharge the battery.

As shown by the arrow, flip out the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

As shown by the arrow, flip out the battery charger’s prongs and insert

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

battery charger’s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the prongs into a power outlet.

For LC-E8E

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For LC-E8E

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu
































27

Charging the Battery

Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.Recharge the battery before using.

Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its power.

After recharging the battery, detach it and unplug the charger from the power outlet.

When not using the camera, remove the battery.If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover (provided) attached. Storing the battery after it is fully charged can lower the battery’s performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.Purchase a new battery.

Tips for Using the Battery and Charger

After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for at least 3 sec.Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E8.The Battery Pack LP-E8 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.


After recharging the battery, detach it and unplug the charger

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAfter recharging the battery, detach it and unplug the charger

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen not using the camera, remove the battery.If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small

ed, resulting in excess discharge

www.devic

eman

uals.

eued, resulting in excess discharge

and shorter battery life. Store the ba

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ttery with the protective cover (provided) attached. Storing the battery after it is fully charged can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(provided) attached. Storing the battery after it is fully charged can lower the battery’s performance.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

lower the battery’s performance.


The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any


portable voltage transformer to t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

portable voltage transformer to tdamage the battery charger.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

damage the battery charger.

28

Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E8 into the camera.

1 Open the cover.Slide the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover.

2 Insert the battery.Insert the end with the battery contacts.Insert the battery until it locks in place.

3 Close the cover.Press the cover until it snaps shut.

Open the cover and remove the battery.

Press the battery release lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery.To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts, be sure to attach the protective cover (provided, p.26) to the battery.

Installing and Removing the BatteryInstalling the Battery

Removing the Battery

After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it back further. Otherwise, the hinge might break.

www.devicemanuals.euInsert the end with the battery

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInsert the end with the battery

Insert the battery until it locks in

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInsert the battery until it locks in

Close the cover.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Close the cover.Press the cover until it snaps shut.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the cover until it snaps shut.






www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





29

The card (sold separately) can be an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card. The captured images are recorded onto the card.

Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable writing/erasing.

1 Open the cover.Slide the cover as shown by the arrows to open it.

2 Insert the card.As shown by the illustration, face the card’s label side toward you and insert it until it clicks in place.

3 Close the cover.Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut.

When you set the power switch to <1>, the number of possible shots (p.33) will be displayed on the LCD monitor.

Installing and Removing the Card

Installing the Card

Write-protect switch

Possible shots

The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.Setting [1 Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card (p.166).


Insert the card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInsert the card.

As shown by the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAs shown by the the card’s label side toward you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the card’s label side toward you and insert it until it clicks in place.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and insert it until it clicks in place.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3

Installing and Removing the Card

30

1 Open the cover.Set the power switch to <2>.Make sure the access lamp is off, then open the cover.If “Recording ...” is displayed, close the cover.

2 Remove the card.Gently push in the card, then let go. The card will stick out.Pull the card straight out, then close the cover.

Removing the Card

Access lamp

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.• Removing the card.• Removing the battery.• Shaking or banging the camera around.If the card already contains recorded images, the image number might not start from 0001 (p.170).Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera (p.45). The card may then return to normal.

www.devicemanuals.euGently push in the card, then let go.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGently push in the card, then let go. The card will stick out.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe card will stick out.Pull the card straight out, then close

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPull the card straight out, then close the cover.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe cover.


When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or

31

After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live View shooting, shoot movies, and playback images and movies. You can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.

1 Flip out the LCD monitor.

2 Rotate the LCD monitor.When the LCD monitor is swung out, you can rotate it up or down or face it forward toward the subject.The indicated angle is only approximate.

3 Face it toward you.Normally, face the LCD monitor toward you.

Using the LCD Monitor

180°

175°

90°

Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.

When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor back with the screen facing inward. This will protect the screen.During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor, the display may turn off right before the LCD monitor is closed.


Rotate the LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRotate the LCD monitor.

When the LCD monitor is swung out,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the LCD monitor is swung out, you can rotate it up or down or face it

www.devic

eman

uals.

euyou can rotate it up or down or face it forward toward the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euforward toward the subject.The indicated angle is only

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe indicated angle is only approximate.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

approximate.

Face it toward you.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Face it toward you.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Normally, face the LCD monitor

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Normally, face the LCD monitor




32

If you turn on the power switch and the date/time setting screen appears, see page 34 to set the date/time.

<1> : The camera turns on.<2> : The camera is turned off and

does not operate. Set to this position when not using the camera.

Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the sensor cleaning will be executed automatically. During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display <f>. Even during the sensor cleaning, you can still shoot by pressing the shutter button halfway (p.40) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture.If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short interval, the <f> icon might not be displayed. This is normal and not a problem.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after about 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the shutter button halfway (p.40).You can change the auto power-off time with [5 Auto power off] (p.167).

Turning on the Power

About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor

3 About Auto Power Off

If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to the card, [Recording ...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the card finishes recording the image.

www.devicemanuals.eu> or <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> or <2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu2ly. During the sensor cleaning,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euly. During the sensor cleaning,

>. Even during the sensor

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>. Even during the sensor

pressing the shutter button halfway

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

pressing the shutter button halfway (p.40) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.40) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture.If you repeatedly turn the power switch <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <> icon might not be displayed. This is normal and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> icon might not be displayed. This is normal and




To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after about www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after about 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just www.devicemanuals.eu

About Auto Power Off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

About Auto Power Off

33

Turning on the Power

When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be indicated in one of four levels:

z : Battery level is OK.

x : Battery level is low, but still enough for now.

c : Battery will be exhausted soon. (Blinks)

n : Battery must be recharged.

Battery Life

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, no Live View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.The Battery Grip BG-E8 approximately doubles the number of possible shots with two LP-E8 batteries installed. With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries, the number of possible shots at 23°C / 73°F is approx. 470 shots without flash use and approx. 270 shots with 50% flash use.

z Checking the Battery Level

Temperature At 23°C / 73°F At 0°C / 32°FNo Flash Approx. 550 shots Approx. 470 shots

50% Flash Use Approx. 440 shots Approx. 400 shots

The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations:• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.• Using the LCD monitor often.• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 125.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Battery must be recharged.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Battery must be recharged.

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, no Live

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, no Live View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing

The Battery Grip BG-E8 approximately doubles the number of possible shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Battery Grip BG-E8 approximately doubles the number of possible shots with two LP-E8 batteries installed. With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries, the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

with two LP-E8 batteries installed. With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries, the number of possible shots at 23°C / 73°F www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

number of possible shots at 23°C / 73°F www.devicemanuals.eu

At 23°C / 73°F

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

At 23°C / 73°F


Approx. 550 shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Approx. 550 shots


Approx. 440 shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Approx. 440 shots

34

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time has been reset, the Date/Time setting screen will appear. Follow steps 3 and 4 to set the date/time. Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

1 Display the menu screen.Press the <M> button to display the menu screen.

2 Under the [6] tab, select [Date/Time].

Press the key to select the [6] tab.Press the <V> key to select [Date/Time], then press <0>.

3 Set the date and time.Press the key to select the date or time number.Press <0> so <a> is displayed.Press the <V> key to set the number, then press <0>. (Returns to b.)

4 Exit the setting.Press the key to select [OK], then press <0>.The date/time will be set.

3 Setting the Date and Time

If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery becomes exhausted, the date/time might be reset. If this happens, set the date/time again.

The date/time set will start from when you press <0> in step 4.

www.devicemanuals.eu] tab, select [Date/

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [Date/

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <U

www.devic

eman

uals.

euU

] tab.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] tab.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <Time

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Time], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], then press <


3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3


Set the date and time.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the date and time.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

35


2 Under the [6] tab, select [LanguageK].

Press the key to select the [6] tab.Press the <V> key to select [LanguageK] (the fourth item from the top), then press <0>.

3 Set the desired language.Press the <S> key to select the language, then press <0>.The interface language will change.

3 Selecting the Interface Language


> key to select

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select

K

www.devic

eman

uals.

euK] (the fourth item from

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (the fourth item from the top), then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe top), then press <

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Set the desired language.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired language.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

36

1 Remove the caps.Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows.

2 Attach the lens.Align the lens’ red or white index with the camera’s index matching the same color. Turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it snaps in place.

3 On the lens, set the focus mode switch to <AF> (autofocus).

If it is set to <MF> (manual focus), autofocus will not operate.

4 Remove the front lens cap.

Attaching and Detaching a LensAttaching a Lens

White index

Red index

Minimizing DustWhen changing lenses, do it in a place with minimal dust.When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to the camera.Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.



the camera’s index matching the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe camera’s index matching the same color. Turn the lens as shown

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusame color. Turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it snaps in place.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euby the arrow until it snaps in place.

On the lens, set the focus mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

On the lens, set the focus mode switch to <AF> (autofocus).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

switch to <AF> (autofocus).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If it is set to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If it is set to <

37

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens with your fingers.If you want to zoom, do it before focusing. Turning the zoom ring after achieving focus may throw off the focus slightly.

While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow.

Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens.

About Zooming

Detaching the Lens

Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision.If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.

Image Conversion FactorSince the image sensor size is smaller than the 35mm film format, it will look like the lens focal length is increased by approx. 1.6x.

Image sensor size (Approx.)(22.3 x 14.9 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)

35mm image size(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)

www.devicemanuals.euWhile pressing the lens release

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton, turn the lens as shown by the arrow.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe arrow.

Turn the lens until it stops, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

detach it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attach the rear lens cap to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

detached lens.

38

When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is based on the EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II lens as an example.* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.

1 Set the IS switch to <1>.Set also the camera’s power switch to <1>.

2 Press the shutter button halfway.The Image Stabilizer will operate.

3 Take the picture.When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder, press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

About the Lens Image Stabilizer

The Image Stabilizer may not be effective if the subject moves at the time of exposure.The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat.

The Image Stabilizer can operate with the focus mode switch set to either <f> or <g>.If the camera is mounted on a tripod, you can save battery power by switching the IS switch to <2>.The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a monopod.Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the shooting conditions. However, the following lenses switch the IS mode automatically:• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS• EF-S 15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM • EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

www.devicemanuals.euPress the shutter button halfway.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway.The Image Stabilizer will operate.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Image Stabilizer will operate.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.

When the picture looks steady in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder, press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

viewfinder, press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

completely to take the picture.


The Image Stabilizer may not be effectiv

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Image Stabilizer may not be effectiv

The Image Stabilizer may not be effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Image Stabilizer may not be effect


on a rocking boat.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on a rocking boat.

39

Turn the dioptric adjustment knob.

Turn the knob left or right until the nine AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.3. Press the shutter button lightly with your right hand’s index finger.4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot in front of the other.6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.

Basic OperationAdjusting the Viewfinder Clarity

Holding the Camera

If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens E (10 types, sold separately) is recommended.

Vertical shootingHorizontal shooting

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 123.


To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera


image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens E (10 types, sold separately) is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens E (10 types, sold separately) is










































Basic Operation

40

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing halfwayThis activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture.The exposure setting (shutter speed and aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder (0).While you press the shutter button halfway, the LCD monitor will turn off (p.179).

Pressing completelyThis releases the shutter and takes the picture.

Preventing Camera ShakeHand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake, note the following:

• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the previous page.• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the

shutter button completely.

Shutter Button

If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.Even during the menu display, image playback, and image recording, you can instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.


aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

www.devic

eman

uals.

euaperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

While you press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile you press the shutter button halfway, the LCD monitor will turn off

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhalfway, the LCD monitor will turn off

Pressing completely

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing completelyThis releases the shutter and takes the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This releases the shutter and takes the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

picture.

Preventing Camera Shake

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Preventing Camera ShakeHand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake. It can cause blurred piwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

camera shake. It can cause blurred piwww.devicemanuals.eu




41

You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen.

1 Press the <Q> button.The Quick Control screen will appear (7).

2 Set the desired function.Press the <S> key to select the function to be set.The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will appear.Turn the <6> dial to change the setting.

3 Take the picture.Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.The captured image will be displayed.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes

For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting procedure, see page 64.


> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the

function to be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufunction to be set.The selected function and Feature

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euguide (p.48) will appear.Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

42

Select the desired function and press <0>. The function’s setting screen will appear.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to change the setting. There are also functions to be set with the <C> button.Press <0> to finalize the setting and to return to the Quick Control screen.

Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen

Function Setting Screen

Shutter speed (p.94)

AF mode (p.83)

White balance (p.117)

Shooting mode* (p.22)Highlight tone priority* (p.254)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109)

Metering mode (p.102)

Picture Style (p.81)

Exposure compensation/AEB setting (p.103, 105) Flash exposure

compensation (p.104)

ISO speed (p.79)

Image-recording quality (p.76)

Aperture (p.96)

Built-in flash function

White balance bracketing*(p.120)

Drive mode (p.88, 89)

White balance correction* (p.119)

Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.

<0>




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto Lighting Optimizer

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto Lighting Optimizer (p.109)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.109)


www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage-recording quality (p.76)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.76)



White balance bracketing*

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

White balance bracketing*(p.120)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.120)



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

43

With menus, you can set various functions such as the image-recording quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use the <M> button, <S> cross keys, and <0> button on the camera back to operate the menus.

In the Basic Zone, Movie shooting mode, and Creative Zone, the tabs and menu options displayed will be different.

3 Menu Operations

Menu Screen

<S> Cross keysLCD monitor<0> button

<M> button

Tab

Menu itemsMenu settings

1 Shooting

5 Set-up

9 My Menu3 Playback

Basic Zone modes Movie shooting mode

Creative Zone modeswww.devicemanuals.eu

In the Basic Zone, Movie shooting mode, and Creative Zone, the tabs

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In the Basic Zone, Movie shooting mode, and Creative Zone, the tabs


and menu options displayed will be different.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and menu options displayed will be different.
















www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Menu Operations

44


2 Select a tab.Press the key to select a menu tab.

3 Select the desired item.Press the <V> key to select the item, then press <0>.

4 Select the setting.Press the <V> or key to select the desired setting. (Some settings require you to press either the <V> or key to select it.)The current setting is indicated in blue.

5 Set the desired setting.Press <0> to set it.

6 Exit the setting.Press the <M> button to return to the shooting settings display.

Menu Setting Procedure

In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab.The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.For details about each menu item, see page 270.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired item.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired item.

> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the item, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euitem, then press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

Select the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <select the desired setting. (Some

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

select the desired setting. (Some

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

45

If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer, format the card with the camera.

When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.

1 Select [Format].Under the [5] tab, select [Format], then press <0>.

2 Format the card.Select [OK], then press <0>.The card will be formatted.When the formatting is completed, the menu will reappear.

For low-level formatting, press the <L> button to checkmark [Low level format] with <X>, then select [OK].

3 Formatting the Card


Format the card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFormat the card.

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [OK

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

OKThe card will be formatted.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The card will be formatted.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the formatting is completed,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the formatting is completed, the menu will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the menu will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Formatting the Card

46

The card is new.The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.The card is full with images or data.A card-related error is displayed (p.287).

Execute [Format] in the following cases:

About Low-level FormattingDo low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card.Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors in the card, the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this case, normal formatting will have been completed and you can use the card as usual.

When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the data from being leaked.Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software in the card must be installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen might be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card.This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

www.devicemanuals.eurecordable sectors in the card, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurecordable sectors in the card, the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euformatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCancel


completed and you can use the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucompleted and you can use the


47

The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu screen, captured images, etc.

When you turn on the power switch, the shooting settings will be displayed.When you press the shutter button halfway, the display will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will turn on.You can also turn off the display by pressing the button. Press the button again to turn on the display.Pressing the <C> button toggles between the shooting settings screen (p.20) and camera settings screen (p.175).

Switching the LCD Monitor Display

Shooting Settings

Appears when you press the <M> button. Press the button again to return to the shooting settings screen.

Appears when you press the <x> button. Press the button again to return to the shooting settings screen.

Menu Functions Captured Image

You can set [5 LCD off/on btn] so that the shooting settings display does not keep turning off and on (p.179).Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton, the display will turn on.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton, the display will turn on.You can also turn off the display by

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can also turn off the display by pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupressing the <B

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBthe button again to turn on the display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe button again to turn on the display.Pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPressing the <between the shooting settings screen

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

between the shooting settings screen (p.20) and camera settings screen

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.20) and camera settings screen (p.175).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.175).



Menu Functions

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Menu Functions


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

48

The Feature guide is a simple description of the respective function or option. It is displayed when you change the shooting mode or use the Quick Control screen to set a shooting function, Live View shooting, movie shooting, or playback. When you select a function or option on the Quick Control screen, the Feature guide description is displayed. The Feature guide turns off when you further proceed with any operation.

Shooting mode (Sample)

Quick Control (Sample)

Select [Feature guide].Under the [6] tab, select [Feature guide], then press <0>. Select [Disable], then press <0>.

Feature Guide

3 Disabling the Feature Guide

Shooting function Live View shooting Playback


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Disabling the Feature Guidewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disabling the Feature Guide

Shooting function Live View shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting function Live View shooting

49

2Basic Shooting and

Image PlaybackThis chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results and how to playback images.

With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot and the camera sets everything automatically (p.64, 268). Also, to prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations, major shooting settings cannot be changed in fully-automatic modes.

Basic Zone

About the Auto Lighting OptimizerIn Basic Zone modes, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109) will adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast. It is also enabled by default in Creative Zone modes.



Basic Shooting and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBasic Shooting and

Image Playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage PlaybackThis chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results and how to playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on the Mode Dial for best results and how to playback

, all you do is point and shoot and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

, all you do is point and shoot and the camera sets everything automatically

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera sets everything automatically


prevent botched pictures due to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

prevent botched pictures due toshooting settings cannot be c

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting settings cannot be c



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

50

The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It is a fully-automatic mode. Even with moving subjects, the camera will automatically continue to focus the subject (p.53).

1 Set the Mode Dial to <A>.

2 Aim any AF point over the subject.

All the AF points will be used to focus, and generally the closest object will be focused.Aiming the center AF point over the subject will make focusing easier.

3 Focus the subject.Press the shutter button halfway, and the lens focusing ring will rotate to focus.The dot inside the AF point achieving focus flashes briefly in red. At the same time, the beeper will sound and the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will light.If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically.

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

AF point

Focus confirmation light

www.devicemanuals.euAll the AF points will be used to focus,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll the AF points will be used to focus, and generally the closest object will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand generally the closest object will

Aiming the center AF point over the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAiming the center AF point over the subject will make

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject will make

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button halfway, and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button halfway, and








www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

51


4 Take the picture.Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.The captured image will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.If the built-in flash has popped up, you can push it back down with your fingers.

The focus confirmation light <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway (p.40). If you are too close to the subject, move away and try again.Sometimes multiple AF points flash simultaneously.This indicates that focus has been achieved at all those AF points. When the AF point covering the desired subject flashes, take the picture.The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light.)It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light.) You can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (Manual Focus), set it to <AF> (Auto Focus).

FAQ

The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative Zone mode and select a suitable Picture Style (p.81).


> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,

and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative


The focus confirmation light <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The focus confirmation light <o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o

Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway (p.40). If y

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shutter button halfway (p.40). If ymove away and try again.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

move away and try again.Sometimes multiple AF points flash simultaneously.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sometimes multiple AF points flash simultaneously.This indicates that focus has been achieved at all those AF points. www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

This indicates that focus has been achieved at all those AF points. When the AF point covering the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

When the AF point covering the www.devicemanuals.euZone mode and select a suitable Picture Style (p.81).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euZone mode and select a suitable Picture Style (p.81).


52

Although it is daylight, the flash popped up.For a backlit subject, the flash may pop up to help lighten the subject’s dark areas.In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called AF-assist beam. Its effective range is about 4 meters/13.1 feet.Although flash was used, the picture came out dark.The subject was too far away. The subject should be within 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark.The subject was too close to the camera, and a shadow was created by the lens barrel. The subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the camera. If a hood has been attached to the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture.

www.devicemanuals.euWhen flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out

The subject was too close to the camera, and a shadow was created

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe subject was too close to the camera, and a shadow was created by the lens barrel. The subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet

www.devic

eman

uals.

euby the lens barrel. The subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the camera. If a hood has been attached to the lens,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

away from the camera. If a hood has been attached to the lens,


remove it before taking the flash picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

remove it before taking the flash picture.

53

Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective.In the <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <5> Sports).

In the <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes) during or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject continuously. As long as you keep aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.

A Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) TechniquesRecomposing the Shot

Shooting a Moving Subject

www.devicemanuals.euDepending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDepending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucreate a balanced background and good perspective.> (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode, while you press the shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode, while you press the shutter

t, the focus will be locked. You can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eut, the focus will be locked. You can

then recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

then recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “foc

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

take the picture. This is called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

us lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

in other Basic Zone modes (except <5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

5



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques

54

Live View shooting allows you to shoot while looking at the image on the LCD monitor. For details, see page 123.

1 Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor.

Press the <A> button.The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

2 Focus the subject.Aim the center AF point < > on the subject.Press the shutter button halfway to focus.When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.

3 Take the picture.Press the shutter button completely.The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor.After the image review ends, the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically.Press the <A> button to exit Live View shooting.

You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions (p.31).

A Live View Shooting

Normal angle Low angle High angle


Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFocus the subject.

Aim the center AF point < > on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAim the center AF point < > on the

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway to focus.When focus is achieved, the AF point

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will turn green and the beeper will sound.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sound.Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button completely.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button completely.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu























www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

55

In places where flash photography is prohibited, use the <7> (Flash Off) mode. This mode is also effective for capturing the particular ambience of a scene, such as candlelight scenes.

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder blinks.Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to reduce blur caused by camera shake.

Taking portraits without flash.In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is taken. If the person moves during the exposure, he or she might look blurred in the picture.

7 Disabling Flash

Shooting Tips


Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady or use a tripod. When using a zoomwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

or use a tripod. When using a zoomwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

56

Unlike the <A> Scene Intelligent Auto mode where the camera sets everything, the <C> Creative Auto mode enables you to easily change the depth of field, drive mode, and flash firing.You can also choose the ambience you want to convey in your images. The default settings are the same as the <A> mode.* CA stands for Creative Auto.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <C>.

2 Press the <Q> button. (7)The Quick Control screen will appear.

3 Set the desired function.Press the <V> key to select a function.The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will be displayed.For details on setting each function, see pages 57-58.

4 Take the picture.Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

C Creative Auto Shooting

If you change the shooting mode or turn the power switch to <2>, the functions you have set on this screen will revert to their default setting. However, the self-timer and remote control settings will be retained.


> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The Quick Control screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Quick Control screen will appear.

Set the desired function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

57


Pressing the <Q> button enables you to set the following:

(1) Shoot by ambience selectionYou can set the ambience you want to convey in your images. Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>. For details, see page 65.

(2) Blurring/sharpening the background

If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will look more in focus. If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Portraits” on page 59. Press the key or turn the <6> dial to adjust it as desired.Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background might not look so blurred. This function cannot be set (grayed out) while the built-in flash is raised in the <a> or <r> mode. If flash is used, this setting will not be applied.

Shutter speed (1)

(2)

(3)

Battery check Possible shots

ISO speed


Aperture


> button enables you to set the following:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button enables you to set the following:

(1) Shoot by ambience selection

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(1) Shoot by ambience selectionYou can set the ambience you want to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can set the ambience you want to> key or turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key or turn the <6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing <details, see page 65.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

details, see page 65.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu






www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

58

(3) Drive mode/Flash firingWhen you press <0>, the drive mode or flash firing setting screen will appear.Set as desired, then press <0> to finalize the setting and return to the Quick Control screen.

Drive mode: Press the key or turn the <6> dial to set it as desired. Single shooting : Shoot one image at a time. Continuous shooting:

While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to about 3.7 shots per sec.

<Q> Self-timer:10sec/Remote control :The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. A remote control can also be used.

<q> Self-timer:Continuous :Press the <V> key to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken.

Flash firing: Press the key or turn the <6> dial to set it as desired.<a> Auto flash: The flash fires automatically when necessary. Flash on : The flash fires at all times. Flash off : The flash is disabled.

When using <j> or <q>, see the notes on page 89.When using , see “Disabling Flash” on page 55.


> dial to set it as

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to set it as

: Shoot one image at a time.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Shoot one image at a time.

While you hold down the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be taken continuously.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

completely, shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to about 3.7 shots per sec.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can shoot up to about 3.7 shots per sec.Self-timer:10sec/Remote control

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Self-timer:10sec/Remote control The picture is taken 10 seconds after you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. A remote control

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the shutter button. A remote control


can also be used.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

can also be used.Self-timer:Continuous

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Self-timer:Continuous

59

The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer.

The further the distance between the subject and background, the better.The further the distance between the subject and background, the more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand out better in front of a plain, dark background.

Use a telephoto lens.If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.

Focus the face.Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red.

2 Shooting Portraits

Shooting Tips

If you hold down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to obtain different poses and facial expressions. (max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec.)If necessary, the built-in flash will pop up automatically.


The further the distance between the subject and background,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The further the distance between the subject and background,

The further the distance between the subject and background, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The further the distance between the subject and background, the more blurred the background will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

more blurred the background will out better in front of a plain, dark background.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

out better in front of a plain, dark background.

Use a telephoto lens.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Use a telephoto lens.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

60

Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery, night scenes, or to have everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth to landscapes.

Shooting night scenes.Since the built-in flash will be disabled, this mode <3> is also good for night scenes. Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.If you want to photograph a person against a night scene, set the Mode Dial to <6> (Night Portrait) and use a tripod (p.63).

3 Shooting Landscapes

Shooting Tips

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.When using the wide-angle end of a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When using the wide-angle end of a will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth to landscapes. www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

to landscapes. www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

61

When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close, use the <4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro lens (sold separately).

Use a simple background.A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.

Move to the subject as close as possible.Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses have indications such as <40.25m/0.8ft>. The lens minimum focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on the top left of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the subject, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.Under low light, the built-in flash will fire. If you are too close to the subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark, move away from the subject.

With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the subject look larger.

4 Shooting Close-ups

Shooting Tips


Use a simple background.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use a simple background.A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.

Move to the subject as close as possible.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Move to the subject as close as possible.Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

62

To photograph a moving subject, whether it is a child running or a moving vehicle, use the <5> (Sports) mode.

Use a telephoto lens.Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar.

Use the center AF point to focus.Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold down the shutter button, continuous shooting (max. approx. 3.7 shots per sec.) and autofocusing will take effect.

5 Shooting Moving Subjects

Shooting Tips

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.


Using a telephoto lens is recommend

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using a telephoto lens is recommend

Use the center AF point to focus.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use the center AF point to focus.Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter button halfway to autofocus. Duriwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

button halfway to autofocus. Duriwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

63

To shoot someone at night and obtain a natural-looking exposure in the background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode.

Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

Keep the person within 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a good exposure of the person. The maximum effective distance of the built-in flash is 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.

Shoot also with <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto).Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also with <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) is recommended.

6 Shooting Portraits at Night

Shooting Tips

Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light briefly after the picture is taken.


Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

Keep the person within 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Keep the person within 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.Under low light, the built-in flash wiwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Under low light, the built-in flash wiwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

64

In Basic Zone modes when the shooting settings screen is displayed, you can press the <Q> button to display the Quick Control screen. The table below indicates the functions that can be set with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode.

1 Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode.

2 Press the <Q> button. (7)The Quick Control screen will appear.

3 Set the function.Press the <V> key to select a function. (Step not necessary in the A/7 mode.)The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will be displayed.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to change the setting.

Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modeso: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable

* Use the <V> key to set the number of continuous shots.

Q Quick Control

Function A(p.50)

7(p.55)

C(p.56)

2(p.59)

3(p.60)

4(p.61)

5(p.62)

6(p.63)

Drive mode

u: Single shooting k k k k k k

i: Continuous shooting k k k

Self-timer

Q: 10 sec./Remote control k k k k k k k k

q: Continuous shooting after 10 sec.* k k k k k k k k

Flash firing

Automatic firing o k o o o

Flash on (Fires at all times) k

Flash off o k o o

Shoot by ambience selection (p.65) k k k k k k

Shoot by lighting or scene type (p.68) k k k k

Blurring/sharpening the background (p.57) k

Example: Portrait mode


> key to select a function. (Step not necessary in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to select a function. (Step not necessary in

The selected function and Feature gui

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The selected function and Feature gui> key or turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key or turn the <Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes: Set automatically

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Set automatically


Function

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Function


: Single shootingwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Single shootingwww.devicemanuals.eu

: Continuous shootingwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

: Continuous shootingwww.devicemanuals.eu

65

Except in the <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) and <7> (Flash Off) Basic Zone modes, you can select the ambience for shooting.

1 Set the Mode Dial to any of the following modes: <C>, <2>, <3>, <4>, <5> or <6>.

2 Display the Live View image.With the Live View image displayed, you can see the ambience effect.Press the <A> button to switch to Live View shooting.

3 On the Quick Control screen, select the desired ambience.

Press the <Q> button (7).Press the <V> key to select [Standard setting]. [Shoot by ambience selection] will appear on the screen’s bottom.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired ambience.The LCD monitor will show how the image will look with the selected ambience.

Shoot by Ambience Selection

Ambience A 7 C 2 3 4 5 6 Ambience Effect(1) Standard setting k k k k k k No setting

(2) Vivid k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

(3) Soft k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

(4) Warm k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

(5) Intense k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

(6) Cool k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

(7) Brighter k k k k k k Low / Medium / High

(8) Darker k k k k k k Low / Medium / High

(9) Monochrome k k k k k k Blue / B/W / Sepia


Set the Mode Dial to any of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the Mode Dial to any of the following modes: <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

following modes: <<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3>, <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, <

2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Display the Live View image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display the Live View image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk


Low / Medium / High

www.devic

eman

uals.

euLow / Medium / High


www.devicemanuals.euk

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

www.devicemanuals.euLow / Medium / High

www.devic

eman

uals.

euLow / Medium / High



k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk


k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk









www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

66

4 Set the ambience effect.Press the <V> key to select the effect bar so that [Effect] appears at the bottom.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired effect.

5 Take the picture.To shoot while the Live View image is displayed, press the shutter button.To return to viewfinder shooting, press the <A> button to exit Live View shooting. Then press the shutter button completely to take the picture.If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, the setting will revert back to [Standard setting].

The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not look exactly the same as the actual photo.Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the screen might not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo. Set [6 LCD brightness] to 4 and look at the Live View image while the screen is unaffected by stray light.

If you don’t want the Live View image to be displayed when setting functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. When you press the <Q> button, the Quick Control screen is displayed and you can set [Shoot by ambience selection] and [Shoot by lighting or scene], then shoot with the viewfinder.


To shoot while the Live View image is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo shoot while the Live View image is displayed, press the shutter button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed, press the shutter button.To return to viewfinder shooting,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo return to viewfinder shooting, A

www.devic

eman

uals.

euA> button to exit Live

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to exit Live

View shooting. Then press the shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

euView shooting. Then press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button completely to take the picture.If you change the shooting mode or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you change the shooting mode or


set the power switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

set the power switch to <setting will revert back to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting will revert back to [setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting


The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not

67


Ambience Settings(1) Standard setting

Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode. Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and <3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.

(2) VividThe subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more impressive than with [Standard setting].

(3) SoftThe subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets, flowers, etc.

(4) WarmThe subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits, pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.

(5) IntenseWhile the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living subject stand out more.

(6) CoolThe overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.

(7) BrighterThe picture will look brighter.

(8) DarkerThe picture will look darker.

(9) MonochromeThe picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome color to be black and white, sepia, or blue. When [Monochrome] is selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.

www.devicemanuals.eure dainty. Good for portraits, pets,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eure dainty. Good for portraits, pets,

fter with warmer colors. Good for portraits,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufter with warmer colors. Good for portraits,

pets, and other subjects to which

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

you want to give a warm look.

ness is slightly lowered, the subject is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ness is slightly lowered, the subject is emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living subject stand out more.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject stand out more.

The overall brightness is slightly lo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The overall brightness is slightly lo


subject in the shade will look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject in the shade will look

68

In the <2> (Portrait), <3> (Landscape), <4> (Close-up), and <5> (Sports) Basic Zone modes, you can shoot while the settings match the lighting or scene type. Normally, [Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eye.For Live View shooting, if you set both [Shoot by lighting or scene type] and [Shoot by ambience selection] (p.65), you should first set [Shoot by lighting or scene type]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the LCD monitor.

1 Set the Mode Dial to any of the following modes: <2>, <3>, <4>, or <5>.

2 Display the Live View image.With the Live View image displayed, you can see the resulting effect.Press the <A> button to switch to Live View shooting.

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type

Lighting or scene A 7 C 2 3 4 5 6

(1) Default setting k k k k

(2) Daylight k k k k

(3) Shade k k k k

(4) Cloudy k k k k

(5) Tungsten light k k k

(6) Fluorescent light k k k

(7) Sunset k k k k


6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6









k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk





k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk


k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk





k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k





k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k







k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k



k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k






1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1 Set the Mode Dial to any of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the Mode Dial to any of the









www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

69


3 On the Quick Control screen, select the lighting or scene type.

Press the <Q> button (7).Press the <V> key to select [Default setting] (shown in the sample screen). [Shoot by lighting or scene type] will appear on the screen’s bottom.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired lighting or scene type.The LCD monitor will show how the image will look with the selected lighting or scene type.

4 Take the picture.To shoot while the Live View image is displayed, press the shutter button.To return to viewfinder shooting, press the <A> button to exit Live View shooting. Then press the shutter button completely to take the picture.If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, the setting will revert back to [Default setting].

If you use flash, the setting will switch to [Default setting]. (However, the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set.)If you want to set this together with [Shoot by ambience selection], set the [Shoot by lighting or scene type] which best matches the ambience you have set. In the case of [Sunset] for example, warm colors will become prominent so the ambience you set might not work well.

If you don’t want the Live View image to be displayed when setting functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. Pressing the <Q> button will display the Quick Control screen. You can then set [Shoot by lighting or scene type] and shoot with the viewfinder.


lighting or scene type.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulighting or scene type.The LCD monitor will show how the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe LCD monitor will show how the image will look with the selected

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage will look with the selected lighting or scene type.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulighting or scene type.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.To shoot while the Live View image is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To shoot while the Live View image is displayed, press the shutter button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed, press the shutter button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To return to viewfinder shooting,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To return to viewfinder shooting,


70

Lighting or Scene Type Settings(1) Default setting

The default setting.(2) Daylight

For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.

(3) ShadeFor subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.

(4) CloudyFor subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

(5) Tungsten lightFor subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange color cast caused by tungsten lighting.

(6) Fluorescent lightFor subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of fluorescent lighting.

(7) SunsetSuitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.

www.devicemanuals.euFor subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and look dull on a cloudy day, look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulook dull on a cloudy day, look warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwarmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

ghting. Reduces the reddish-orange

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ghting. Reduces the reddish-orange color cast caused by tungsten lighting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

color cast caused by tungsten lighting.

For subjects under fluorescent li

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ghting. Suited for all types of

Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.

71

The easiest way to playback images is explained below. For more details on the playback procedure, see page 201.

1 Playback the image.When you press the <x> button, the last image captured will be displayed.

2 Select an image.To view images starting with the last image, press the <Y> key. To view images starting with the first (oldest) image, press the <Z> key.Each time you press the <C> button, the display format will change.

3 Exit the image playback.Press the <x> button to exit the image playback and return to the shooting settings display.

x Image Playback

No information

Histogram

With basic information

Shooting information display


To view images starting with the last

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo view images starting with the last image, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage, press the <Y

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYimages starting with the first (oldest)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimages starting with the first (oldest) image, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage, press the <Each time you press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Each time you press the <button, the display format will change.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button, the display format will change.


No information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

No information


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

72

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

73

3Creative Shooting

In the Basic Zone modes, to prevent spoiled shots, most functions are set automatically and cannot be changed. In the <d> (Program AE) mode, you can set various functions and be more creative.

In the <d> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure.The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <d> is explained on page 268.The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes explained in Chapter 4.The M mark shown on the right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (p.22).

* <d> stands for Program.* AE stands for Auto Exposure.



Creative Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCreative Shooting

prevent spoiled shots,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

prevent spoiled shots, most functions are set automatically and cannot be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

most functions are set automatically and cannot be > (Program AE) mode, you can set

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> (Program AE) mode, you can set various functions and be more creative.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

various functions and be more creative.

> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and


aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure.The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <explained on page 268.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

explained on page 268.The functions explained in this www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

The functions explained in this

74

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <d>.

2 Focus the subject.Look through the viewfinder and aim the selected AF point over the subject. Then press the shutter button halfway.The dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder’s bottom right lights (with One Shot AF).The shutter speed and aperture will be set automatically and displayed in the viewfinder.

3 Check the display.A standard exposure will be obtained as long as the shutter speed and aperture display do not blink.

4 Take the picture.Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.

d: Program AE


subject. Then press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusubject. Then press the shutter button

The dot inside the AF point achieving

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights briefly in red, and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufocus lights briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufocus confirmation light <viewfinder’s bottom right lights (with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

viewfinder’s bottom right lights (with One Shot AF).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

One Shot AF).The shutter speed and aperture will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The shutter speed and aperture will be set automatically and displayed in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

be set automatically and displayed in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the viewfinder.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Check the display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check the display.

75

d: Program AE

Change the ISO speed or use the built-in flash.To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the ISO speed (p.79) or use the built-in flash (p.90). In the <d> mode, the built-in flash will not fire automatically. So under low light, press the (Flash) button to raise the built-in flash.The program can be shifted. (Program shift)After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination (program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.

Shooting Tips

If the “30"” shutter speed and the maximum aperture blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use flash.If the “4000” shutter speed and the minimum aperture blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO speed.

Differences Between <d> and <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto)With <A>, many functions such the AF mode, drive mode, and built-in flash are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set are limited. With <d>, only the shutter speed and aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF mode, drive mode, built-in flash, and other functions (p.268).


change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination

www.devic

eman

uals.

euchange the shutter speed and aperture setting combination

ed automatically after the picture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eued automatically after the picture not possible with flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu not possible with flash.

76

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten image-recording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b, c, 1, 1+73.

1 Select [Quality].Under the [1] tab, select [Quality], then press <0>.[Quality] will appear.

2 Select the image-recording quality.

The respective quality’s pixel count and number of possible shots will be displayed to help you select the desired quality. Then press <0>.

* Figures for the file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst are based on Canon’s 4GB test card and testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100, and Standard Picture Style). These figures will vary depending on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.

3 Setting the Image-recording Quality

Pixel countPossible shots

Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)

Quality Pixels Recorded (megapixels)

File Size (MB)

Possible Shots

Maximum Burst

73 High quality

JPEG

Approx. 17.9(18M)

6.4 570 3483 3.2 1120 112074 Medium

qualityApprox. 8.0

(8M)3.4 1070 1070

84 1.7 2100 21007a

Low quality

Approx. 4.5(4.5M)

2.2 1670 16708a 1.1 3180 3180

bApprox. 2.5

(2.5M) 1.3 2780 2780

cApprox. 0.35

(0.35M) 0.3 10780 10780

1 High quality

Approx. 17.9(18M)

24.5 150 61+73 24.5+6.4 110 3

www.devicemanuals.euThe respective quality’s pixel count

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe respective quality’s pixel count and number of possible shots will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand number of possible shots will be displayed to help you select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed to help you select the desired quality. Then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudesired quality. Then press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Pixels Recorded

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pixels Recorded (megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(megapixels)



Approx. 17.9

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Approx. 17.9

77


I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper size for printing.

Refer to the diagram on the left when choosing the image-recording quality. If you want to crop the image, selecting a higher quality (more pixels) such as 73, 83, 1, or 1+73 is recommended.b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame. c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site.

What’s the difference between 7 and 8?It indicates a different image quality due to a different compression rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the 7 image has higher image quality. If 8 is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower, but more images can be saved to the card. Both b and c have 7 (Fine) quality.I could take more shots than the number of possible shots indicated.Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take more shots than was indicated. It might also be fewer than indicated. The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate.Does the camera display the maximum burst?The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder’s right side. Since it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 9 will be displayed only as “9.” Note that this number will also be displayed even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot without a card in the camera.When should I use 1?1 images require processing with your computer. For details, see “About 1” and “About 1+73” on the next page.

FAQ

Paper size

A2 (42x59.4cm/16.5x23.4in.)

A3 (42x29.7cm/

16.5x11.7in.)

A4 (29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.)

12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.

73831

1+7374847a

8ab


digital photo frame.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudigital photo frame. c

www.devic

eman

uals.

euc is suitable for

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu is suitable for

emailing the image or using it on a Web

www.devic

eman

uals.

euemailing the image or using it on a Web

7

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

7 and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and It indicates a different image qualit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

It indicates a different image qualit


y due to a different compression

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

y due to a different compression rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower, but more images can be saved to the card. Both

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

but more images can be saved to the card. Both


I could take more shots than the number of possible shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

I could take more shots than the number of possible shots

Depending on the shooting conditiwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depending on the shooting conditimore shots than was indicated. It might also be fewer than indicated. www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

more shots than was indicated. It might also be fewer than indicated.


78

1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images. Although 1 images require software like Digital Photo Professional (provided, p.305) so they can be displayed on the computer, they also offer flexibility for image adjustments possible only with 1. 1 is effective when you want to precisely adjust the image yourself or shoot an important subject.

1+73 records both a 1 and 73 image with a single shot. The two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). 73 images can be viewed or printed even with a computer which does not have the software provided with the camera installed.

About 1

About 1+73

0001 . JPG

0001 . CR2

File number File extension

1 image

73 image

Commercially-available software might not be able to display RAW images. Using the provided software is recommended.

www.devicemanuals.eu image with a single shot. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu image with a single shot. The multaneously. The two images will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumultaneously. The two images will

be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension

www.devic

eman

uals.

eube saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension

images can be viewed or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images can be viewed or printed even with a computer which does not have the software

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

printed even with a computer which does not have the software
















79

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set automatically (p.80).

1 Press the <Z> button. (9)[ISO speed] will appear.

2 Set the ISO speed.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired ISO speed, then press <0>.You can also set the ISO speed in the viewfinder while turning the <6> dial.With [AUTO] selected, the ISO speed will be set automatically (p.80).

ISO Speed Guide

* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.

Z: Changing the ISO SpeedN

ISO Speed Shooting Situation (No flash) Flash Range100 - 400 Sunny outdoors The higher the ISO speed,

the farther the flash range will extend (p.90).

400 - 1600 Overcast skies or evening time1600 - 6400, H Dark indoors or night

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On], “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) can also be set (p.252).

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) cannot be selected (p.254).Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier. Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.) may become noticeable.


Set the ISO speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the ISO speed.

U

www.devic

eman

uals.

euU> key or turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the > dial to select the desired ISO

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to select the desired ISO speed, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euspeed, then press <You can also set the ISO speed in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can also set the ISO speed in the viewfinder while turning the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

viewfinder while turning the <With [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With [AUTO

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AUTOwill be set automatically (p.80).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will be set automatically (p.80).


Shooting Situation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting Situation


Sunny outdoors

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sunny outdoors




Overcast skies or evening time

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Overcast skies or evening time



1600 - 6400, H www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1600 - 6400, H www.devicemanuals.eu

Z: Changing the ISO SpeedN

80

If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway. As indicated below, the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode.

*1: Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures.*2: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set.*3: If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set.*4: If bounce flash is used with an external Speedlite in a Basic Zone (except

<6>) mode, <d> or <8> mode, ISO 400 - 1600 (or up to the maximum limit) will be set automatically.

For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400 - 6400.

Under the [y] tab, select [ISO Auto], then press <0>. Select the ISO speed, then press <0>.

ISO [AUTO]

Shooting Mode ISO Speed SettingA/7/C/3/4/5/6 Automatically set within ISO 100 - 3200d/s/f/a*1/8 Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400*2

2 Fixed at ISO 100With flash Fixed at ISO 400*3*4

3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for ISO AutoN

When [AUTO] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments. Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.226), you may find an ISO speed like 125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed.In the <2> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used even if ISO 100 is not displayed.ww

w.devicemanuals.eu

Automatically set within ISO 100 - 3200

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAutomatically set within ISO 100 - 3200

www.devicemanuals.euAutomatically set within ISO 100 - 6400

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAutomatically set within ISO 100 - 6400





Fixed at ISO 400

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFixed at ISO 400*3*4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu*3*4


*2: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

*2: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set.e, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

e, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set.*4: If bounce flash is used with an external Speedlite in a Basic Zone (except

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

*4: If bounce flash is used with an external Speedlite in a Basic Zone (except > mode, ISO 400 - 1600 (or up to the maximum

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> mode, ISO 400 - 1600 (or up to the maximum




] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments. Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.226), you may find an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.226), you may find an ISO speed like 125 or 640 di

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ISO speed like 125 or 640 di


> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used even if ISO 100 is not displayed.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

even if ISO 100 is not displayed.

81

By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject.In Basic Zone modes, you cannot select the Picture Style.

1 Press the <XA> button.[Picture Style] will appear.

2 Select a Picture Style.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select a Picture Style, then press <0>.

D AutoThe color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.

P StandardThe image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes.

Q PortraitFor nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Good for close-up portraits.By changing the [Color tone] (p.113), you can adjust the skin tone.

A Selecting the Subject’s Optimal Image CharacteristicsN

Picture Style Characteristics

If the desired color tone is not obtained, use another Picture Style.www.devicemanuals.eu

Select a Picture Style.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect a Picture Style.

U

www.devic

eman

uals.

euU> key or turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the > dial to select a Picture Style,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to select a Picture Style, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthen press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0


The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The colors will look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid, especially for

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

vivid, especially for


blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in nature,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

outdoor, and sunset scenes.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



If the desired color tone is not obtained, use another Picture Style.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the desired color tone is not obtained, use another Picture Style.

A Selecting the Subject’s Optimal Image CharacteristicsN

82

R LandscapeFor vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for impressive landscapes.

S NeutralThis Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.

U FaithfulThis Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer. When the subject is captured under a color temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match the subject’s color. The image looks dull and subdued.

V MonochromeCreates black-and-white images.

W User Def. 1-3You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.115). Any User Defined Picture Style which has not been set will have the same default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.

Other than with 1, the black-and-white image cannot be reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome] setting has been canceled. When [Monochrome] is set, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutemperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutemperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match the subject’s color. The image looks dull and subdued.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe subject’s color. The image looks dull and subdued.



You can register a basic style such as [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can register a basic style such as [Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style file, etc., and adjust itDefined Picture Style which has not been set will have the same

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Defined Picture Style which has not been set will have the same default settings as the [www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

default settings as the [www.devicemanuals.eu

, the black-and-white image cannot be reverted to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

, the black-and-white image cannot be reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the ] setting has been canceled. When [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] setting has been canceled. When [> will appear in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> will appear in the viewfinder.

83

You can select the AF (autofocus) mode to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the most suitable AF mode is set automatically.

1 On the lens, set the focus mode switch to <AF>.

2 Press the <ZE> button.[AF mode] will appear.

3 Select the AF mode.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired AF mode, then press <0>.

4 Focus the subject.Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. The camera will then autofocus in the selected AF mode.

Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.

When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will also light.With evaluative metering (p.102), the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved.While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

E: Changing the Autofocus ModeN

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

www.devicemanuals.eu> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

] will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] will appear.

Select the AF mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the AF mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4

E: Changing the Autofocus ModeN

84

This AF mode is for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.When the AF point selection (p.85) is automatic, the camera first uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point.

AI Focus AF switches the AF mode from One-Shot AF to AI Servo AF automatically if the still subject starts moving.

After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF mode, if the subject starts moving, the camera will detect the movement and change the AF mode automatically to AI Servo AF.

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects

AI Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Mode

If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, a picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to focus again. Or see “Subjects Difficult to Focus” (p.87).If [1 Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved.

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved. Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light.

When focus is achieved in the AI Focus AF mode with the Servo mode active, the beeper will sound continuously sofltly. However, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light.


This AF mode is for moving subjects when the focusing distance

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis AF mode is for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eukeeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway,

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.When the AF point selection (p.85) is automatic, the camera first

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the AF point selection (p.85) is automatic, the camera first

During autofocusing, if the subject

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF po

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

int, focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

long as the subject is covered by another AF point.



AI Focus AF switches the AF mode from One-Shot AF to AI Servo www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AI Focus AF switches the AF mode from One-Shot AF to AI Servo www.devicemanuals.eu

AI Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Modewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

AI Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Modewww.devicemanuals.eu

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved. irmation light <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

irmation light <

85

In Basic Zone modes, the camera will normally focus the closest subject automatically. Therefore, it might not always focus your target subject.In the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <a> modes, you can select the AF point and use it to focus the target subject.

1 Press the <S> button. (9)The selected AF point will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.

2 Select the AF point.Press the <S> key to select the AF point.While looking at the viewfinder, you can select the AF point by turning the <6> dial until the desired AF point lights in red.When all the AF points light up, automatic AF point selection will be set. The AF point will be selected automatically to focus the subject.Pressing <0> toggles the AF point selection between the center AF point and automatic AF point selection.

3 Focus the subject.Aim the selected AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway to focus.

S Selecting the AF Point N

www.devicemanuals.euSelect the AF point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the AF point.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <S

www.devic

eman

uals.

euS> key to select the AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the AF

While looking at the viewfinder, you

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile looking at the viewfinder, you can select the AF point by turning the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

can select the AF point by turning the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6> dial until the desired AF point

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial until the desired AF point lights in red.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

lights in red.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When all the AF points light up,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When all the AF points light up,

S Selecting the AF Point N

86

When shooting a portrait up close, use One-Shot AF and focus the eyes.If you focus the eyes first, you can then recompose and the face will remain sharp.If it is difficult to focus, select and use the center AF point.The center AF point is the most sensitive among the nine AF points.To make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to automatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF (p.84).The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point.

Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway, the built-in flash fires a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to enable easier autofocusing.

Shooting Tips

AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash

The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes: <7>, <3> and <5>.The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted in the AI Servo AF mode.The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is about 4 meters/13.1 feet.In Creative Zone modes when you raise the built-in flash with the button (p.90), the AF-assist beam will be fired when necessary.

If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the maximum aperture becomes smaller than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possible (except in [Live mode] and [u Live mode] during Live View shooting). For details, see the Extender’s instruction manual.


To make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to automatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautomatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF (p.84)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.84)used to focus the subject. During

www.devic

eman

uals.

euused to focus the subject. During away from the center AF point,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euaway from the center AF point,

as the subject is covered by

www.devic

eman

uals.

euas the subject is covered by


Under low-light conditions, when you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under low-light conditions, when you the built-in flash fires a brief burst of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the built-in flash fires a brief burst of enable easier autofocusing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

enable easier autofocusing.


the Built-in Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the Built-in Flash


The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes: > and <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

> and <The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted in the AI Servo AF mode.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted in the AI Servo AF mode.

87

Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus confirmation light <o> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:

Very low-contrast subjects.(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)Subjects in very low lightExtremely backlit or reflective subjects(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)Near and far subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)Repetitive patterns(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

In such cases, do one of the following:(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the

subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.53).(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.

1 Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF>.

2 Focus the subject.Focus by turning the lens focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder.

Subjects Difficult to Focus

MF: Manual Focusing

For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with [Live mode]/[u Live mode] during Live View shooting, see page 134.

Focusing ring

If you hold down the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point achieving focus will light in red briefly, the beeper will sound, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will light.


(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the

subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.53).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusubject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.53).

(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

MF> and focus manually.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> and focus manually.




MF: Manual Focusing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

MF: Manual Focusing


For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with [] during Live View shooting, see page 134.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] during Live View shooting, see page 134.

88

You can shoot up to about 3.7 shots per sec. This is effective for shooting a child running toward you or capturing different facial expressions.

1 Press the <YiQ> button.

2 Select .Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select continuous shooting , then press <0>.

3 Take the picture.The camera shoots continuously while you hold down the shutter button completely.

Also set the AF mode (p.83) matching the subject.• For a moving subject

When AI Servo AF is set, focusing will be continuous during continuous shooting.

• For still subjectsWhen One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during continuous shooting.

Flash can also be used.Since the flash will require recycling time, the continuous shooting speed will be slower.

i Continuous ShootingN

Shooting Tips

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [5: High ISO speed noise reduction] (p.254) is set to [2: Strong], the maximum continuous shooting burst will greatly decrease.In AI Servo AF mode, the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.The continuous shooting speed might also decrease indoors and under low light.

www.devicemanuals.euThe camera shoots continuously

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe camera shoots continuously while you hold down the shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwhile you hold down the shutter button completely.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton completely.

(p.83)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.83) matching the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

matching the subject.• For a moving subject

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• For a moving subjectWhen AI Servo AF is set, focu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When AI Servo AF is set, focucontinuous shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

continuous shooting.


• For still subjectswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• For still subjectsWhen One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

When One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during

89

1 Press the <YiQ> button.

2 Select the self-timer.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired self-timer, then press <0>.Q : 10-sec. self-timer

The remote control can also be used. (p.261)

l : 2-sec. self-timerN (p.122)q : 10-sec. self-timer plus

continuous shotsPress the <V> key to set the number of continuous shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer.

3 Take the picture.Look through the viewfinder, focus the subject, then press the shutter button completely.You can check the self-timer operation with the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown display (in seconds) on the LCD monitor.

Two seconds before the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp will stay on and the beeper will sound faster.

j Using the Self-timer

With <q>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged depending on the shooting functions settings such as the image-recording quality or flash.

After taking self-timer shots, you should check the image for proper focus and exposure (p.71).If you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.262). If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.53) on an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <YiQ> button. To cancel the self-timer during Live View shooting, set the power switch to <2>.


2-sec. self-timer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu2-sec. self-timer10-sec. self-timer plus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu10-sec. self-timer plus continuous shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucontinuous shotsPress the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <number of continuous shots (2 to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunumber of continuous shots (2 to

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Look through the viewfinder, focus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Look through the viewfinder, focus the subject, then press the shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the subject, then press the shutter

Two seconds before the picture is takwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Two seconds before the picture is takon and the beeper will sound faster.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

on and the beeper will sound faster.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

90

In indoors, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built-in flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the <d> mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set automatically to prevent camera shake.

1 Press the <D> button.In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <D> button anytime to take flash pictures.While the flash is recycling, “DbuSY” is displayed in the viewfinder, and [BUSYD] is displayed on the LCD monitor.

2 Press the shutter button halfway.In the bottom left of the viewfinder, check that the <D> icon is lit.

3 Take the picture.When focus is achieved and you press the shutter button completely, the flash will fire for the picture.

Effective Flash Range [Approx. in meters/feet]

* For fill flash, the ISO speed might be set lower than ISO 400.

D Using the Built-in Flash

ISO speed(p.79)

EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS IIEF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

Wide Angle Telephoto100 1 - 3.7 / 3.3 - 12.1 1 - 2.3 / 3.3 - 7.5200 1 - 5.3 / 3.3 - 17.4 1 - 3.3 / 3.3 - 10.8

400/AUTO* 1 - 7.4 / 3.3 - 24.3 1 - 4.6 / 3.3 - 15.1800 1 - 10.5 / 3.3 - 34.4 1 - 6.6 / 3.3 - 21.71600 1 - 14.9 / 3.3 - 48.9 1 - 9.3 / 3.3 - 30.53200 1 - 21.0 / 3.3 - 68.9 1 - 13.1 / 3.3 - 43.06400 1 - 29.7 / 3.3 - 97.4 1 - 18.6 / 3.3 - 61.0

H: 12800 1 - 42.0 / 3.3 - 137.8 1 - 26.3 / 3.3 - 86.3


is displayed in the viewfinder, and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis displayed in the viewfinder, and

] is displayed on the LCD

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] is displayed on the LCD

Press the shutter button halfway.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway.

In the bottom left of the viewfinder,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In the bottom left of the viewfinder, check that the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

check that the <Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.When focus is achieved and you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When focus is achieved and you press the shutter button completely,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the shutter button completely,

Effective Flash Range

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Effective Flash Range







EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS IIwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS IIwww.devicemanuals.eu

91


If the subject is far away, increase the ISO speed (p.79).By increasing the ISO speed, you can extend the flash range.In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO speed.Detach the lens hood and keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the subject.If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject, the bottom of the picture might look dark due to the obstructed flash. For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can reduce red eye. Red-eye reduction will work in any shooting mode except <7>, <3>, <5>, or <k>.

Under the [1] tab, select [Red-eye reduc.], then press <0>. Select [Enable], then press <0>.For flash photography, when you press the shutter button halfway, the red-eye reduction lamp will light. Then when you press the shutter button completely, the picture will be taken.

Shooting Tips

3 Red-eye Reduction

The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are close to the subject.When you press the shutter button halfway, the scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture after this scale display turns off.The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.


If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,

dark due to the obstructed flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu dark due to the obstructed flash. For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

Using the red-eye reduction lamp

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

before taking a flash picture can reduce red eye. Red-eye reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

reduce red eye. Red-eye reduction will work in any shooting mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will work in any shooting mode



>, or <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, or <k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

92

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

93

4Advanced Shooting

This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more ways to shoot creatively.

The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <s>, <f>, <a>, and <8> modes on the Mode Dial.All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes.To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode, see page 268.The M mark shown on the right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (p.22).

The pointer icon <c> displayed together with the shutter speed, aperture setting, or exposure compensation amount indicates that you can turn the <6> dial to adjust the respective setting.

c About the Main Dial Pointer


www.devicemanuals.euAdvanced Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdvanced Shooting

This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more

The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <8

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

8> modes on the Mode Dial.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> modes on the Mode Dial.All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in


f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

f>, and <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, and <To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode, see page 268.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

see page 268. mark shown on the right of the page title indicates www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

mark shown on the right of the page title indicates

94

You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <s> (Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.* <s> stands for Time value.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <s>.

2 Set the desired shutter speed.See “Shooting Tips” for advice on setting the shutter speed.Turning the <6> dial to the right sets a faster shutter speed, and turning it to the left sets a slower one.

3 Take the picture.When you focus and press the shutter button completely, the picture will be taken at the selected shutter speed.

s: Action Shots

Blurred motion(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen action(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

Shutter Speed DisplayThe LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However, the viewfinder displays only the denominator. Also, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.




Set the Mode Dial to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the Mode Dial to <

Set the desired shutter speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired shutter speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

See “Shooting Tips” for advice on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

See “Shooting Tips” for advice on setting the shutter speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting the shutter speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Frozen action

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFrozen action

(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

95

s: Action Shots

To freeze the action or moving subject.Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.

To blur a running child or animal giving the impression of fast movement.Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady to prevent camera shake.

How to blur a flowing river or water fountain.Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to prevent hand-held camera shake.

Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not blink.If you press the shutter button halfway and change the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed, the aperture display will also change to maintain the same exposure (amount of light reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that the standard exposure cannot be obtained.If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed.If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set aperture. The flash sync speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.

Shooting Tips


www.devicemanuals.euHow to blur a flowing river or water fountain.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHow to blur a flowing river or water fountain.Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUse a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to

Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not

If you press the shutter button halfway and change

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you press the shutter button halfway and change the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed, the aperture display will also change to maintain the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the aperture display will also change to maintain the same exposure (amount of light reaching the image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

same exposure (amount of light reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture


range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that the standard exposure cannot be obtained.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

the standard exposure cannot be obtained.If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest

96

To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp, set the Mode Dial to <f> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of field (range of acceptable focus).* <f> stands for Aperture value which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <f>.

2 Set the desired aperture.The higher the f/number, the wider the depth of field where sharper focus is obtained in both the foreground and background.Turning the <6> dial to the right will set a higher f/number (smaller aperture opening), and turning it to the left will set a lower f/number (larger aperture opening).

3 Take the picture.Focus and press the shutter button completely. The picture will be taken with the selected aperture.

f: Changing the Depth of Field

Sharp foreground and background(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

Blurred background(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Aperture DisplayThe higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the Mode Dial to <

Set the desired aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The higher the f/number, the wider

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The higher the f/number, the wider the depth of field where sharper focus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the depth of field where sharper focus

www.devicemanuals.euSharp foreground and background

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSharp foreground and background(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

97


When using an aperture with a high f/number, note that camera shake can occur in low light scenes.A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower. Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a tripod.

The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on the lens and on the subject distance.Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens has a narrow depth of field.And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther subject will have a wider depth of field.

Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not blink.If you press the shutter button halfway and change the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed, the shutter speed display will also change to maintain the same exposure (amount of light reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed display will blink to indicate that the standard exposure cannot be obtained.If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set a lower aperture f/number or increase the ISO speed.If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/4000 sec.) shutter speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to set a higher aperture f/number or decrease the ISO speed.

Shooting Tips

www.devicemanuals.euSince wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSince wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need

www.devic

eman

uals.

euacceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunot set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens

www.devic

eman

uals.

euforeground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens

And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther subject will have a wider depth of field.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject will have a wider depth of field.

Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed, the shutter speed display will also change to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the shutter speed display will also change to maintain the same exposure (amount of light www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

maintain the same exposure (amount of light reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the


98

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically to match the set aperture (autoflash exposure). The shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness.In low light, the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash, and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. Both the subject and background look properly exposed (automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.If you do not want a slow shutter speed to be used, set [3: Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [2: 1/200 sec. (fixed)] in [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.252).

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.

When you press the depth-of-field preview button, you can see the actual depth of field before you shoot.


Depth of Field PreviewN

While looking at the Live View image (p.124) and holding down the depth-of-field preview button, you can change the aperture and see how the depth of field changes.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusteady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusteady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.If you do not want a slow shutter speed to be used, set [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you do not want a slow shutter speed to be used, set [3: Flash sync.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu3: Flash sync. 1: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] or [2: 1/200 sec.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu2: 1/200 sec. ] (p.252).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (p.252).

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or LCD

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.























99

You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired. While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.* <a> stands for Manual.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

2 Set the shutter speed and aperture.

To set the shutter speed, turn the <6> dial.To set the aperture, hold down the <O> button and turn the <6> dial.

3 Focus the subject.Press the shutter button halfway.The exposure setting will be displayed in the viewfinder.The exposure level mark <h> indicates how far the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level.

4 Set the exposure and take the picture.

Set the shutter speed and aperture as desired.If the exposure set exceeds ±2 stops from the standard exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator will display or <J> in the viewfinder. (On the LCD monitor, if the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops, the <N> icon will blink at where<-3> or <+3> is displayed.)

a: Manual Exposure

<6><O> + <6>

Exposure level mark

Standard exposure index

If [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has been set.


To set the shutter speed, turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo set the shutter speed, turn the

To set the aperture, hold down the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo set the aperture, hold down the > button and turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button and turn the <

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Focus the subject.Press the shutter button halfway.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button halfway.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The exposure setting will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The exposure setting will be displayed in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

a: Manual Exposure

100

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture. The flash sync speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. and bulb.

A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open for as long as you hold down the shutter button. It can be used to photograph fireworks, etc.In step 2 on the preceding page, turn the <6> dial to the left to set <BULB>. The elapsed exposure time will be displayed on the LCD monitor.

I Using the Built-in Flash

BULB: Bulb Exposures

During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image might look a little grainy.You can reduce the noise due to long exposures by setting [4: Long exp. noise reduction] to [1: Auto] or [2: On] in the [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.253).

For bulb exposures, using a tripod and Remote Switch (sold separately, p.262) is recommended.You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.261) for bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure.


button. It can be used to photograph

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton. It can be used to photograph

In step 2 on the preceding page, turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIn step 2 on the preceding page, turn the > dial to the left to set <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to the left to set <

The elapsed exposur

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe elapsed exposurdisplayed on the LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed on the LCD monitor.


During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward the sun. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.Since bulb exposures produce more www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Since bulb exposures produce more

101

Objects in the foreground and background will be in focus automatically. All the AF points will function to detect the subject, and the aperture required to attain the necessary depth of field will be set automatically.* <8> stands for Auto-Depth of field. This mode sets the depth of field

automatically.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <8>.

2 Focus the subject.Aim the AF points over the subjects and press the shutter button halfway (0).All the subjects covered by the AF points flashing in red will be in focus.If focus is not achieved, the picture cannot be taken.

3 Take the picture.

The aperture display in the viewfinder blinks.The exposure is correct, but the desired depth of field cannot be obtained. Either use a wide-angle lens or move farther away from the subjects.The shutter speed display in the viewfinder blinks.If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it means that the subject is too dark. Increase the ISO speed. If the “4000” shutter speed blinks, it means that the subject is too bright. Decrease the ISO speed.A slow shutter speed has been set.Use a tripod to steady the camera.I want to use flash.Flash can be used, however, the result will be the same as using the <d> mode with flash. The desired depth of field will not be obtained.

8: Automatic Depth-of-Field AE

FAQ


Aim the AF points over the subjects

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAim the AF points over the subjects and press the shutter button halfway

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand press the shutter button halfway

All the subjects covered by the AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll the subjects covered by the AF points flashing in red will be in focus.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

points flashing in red will be in focus.If focus is not achieved, the picture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If focus is not achieved, the picture cannot be taken.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cannot be taken.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.


The aperture display in the viewfinder blinks.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The aperture display in the viewfinder blinks.The exposure is correct, but the desired depth of field cannot be www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

The exposure is correct, but the desired depth of field cannot be www.devicemanuals.eu

obtained. Either use a wide-angle lenswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

obtained. Either use a wide-angle lens

102

Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended.In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.

1 Select [Metering mode].Under the [2] tab, select [Metering mode], then press <0>.

2 Set the metering mode.Select the desired metering mode, then press <0>.

q Evaluative metering This is an all-around metering mode suited for portraits and even backlit subjects. The camera sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene.

w Partial meteringEffective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The gray area in the left figure is where the brightness is metered to obtain the standard exposure.

r Spot meteringThis is for metering a specific part of the subject or scene. The gray area in the left figure is where the brightness is metered to obtain the standard exposure. This metering mode is for advanced users.

e Center-weighted average meteringThe brightness is metered at the center and then averaged for the entire scene. This metering mode is for advanced users.

q Changing the Metering ModeN

With q, the exposure setting will be locked when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. With w, r, and e, the exposure setting is set at the moment of exposure. (The exposure setting is not locked when you press the shutter button halfway.)


This is an all-around metering mode suited for

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis is an all-around metering mode suited for portraits and even backlit subjects. The camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euportraits and even backlit subjects. The camera sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene.

Partial metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Partial meteringEffective when the background is much brighter

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The gray

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The gray area in the left figure is where the brightness is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

area in the left figure is where the brightness is metered to obtain the standard exposure.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

metered to obtain the standard exposure.r

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

r Spot metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Spot meteringThis is for metering a specific part of the subject or www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

This is for metering a specific part of the subject or www.devicemanuals.eu

103

Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not come out as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes (except <a>). You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

Making it brighter:Hold down the <O> button and turn the <6> dial to the right. (Increased exposure)

Making it darker:Hold down the <O> button and turn the <6> dial to the left. (Decreased exposure)

As shown in the figure, the exposure level is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.After taking the picture, cancel the exposure compensation by setting it back to 0.

Setting Exposure CompensationNO Setting Exposure Compensation

Increased exposure for a brighter image

Decreased exposure for a darker image

The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2 stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display or <J>.The exposure compensation can also be set with [2 Expo. comp./AEB] (p.105). If you will set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops, you should use [2 Expo. comp./AEB] to set it.

Dark exposure Increased exposure for a brighter image

www.devicemanuals.euHold down the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHold down the <O

www.devic

eman

uals.

euO6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6> dial to the left.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to the left. (Decreased exposure)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Decreased exposure)

As shown in the figure, the exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

As shown in the figure, the exposure level is displayed on the LCD monitor

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

level is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After taking the picture, cancel the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After taking the picture, cancel the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu
























www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting Exposure CompensationN

104

Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject does not come out as desired. You can set the flash exposure compensation up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

1 Press the <Q> button. (7)The Quick Control screen will appear (p.41).

2 Select [y].Press the <S> key to select [y*].[Flash exposure comp.] will be displayed at the bottom.

3 Set the flash exposure compensation amount.

To make the flash exposure brighter, turn the <6> dial to the right. To make it darker, turn the <6> dial to the left. (Decreased exposure)

When you press the shutter button halfway, the <y> icon will appear in the viewfinder.

After taking the picture, cancel the flash exposure compensation by setting it back to 0.

y Flash Exposure Compensation

If [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set.

You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash func. setting] in [1 Flash control] (p.181).


S

www.devic

eman

uals.

euS> key to select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select [

Flash exposure comp.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlash exposure comp.

displayed at the bottom.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed at the bottom.Set the flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the flash exposure compensation amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To make the flash exposure brighter,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To make the flash exposure brighter,

105

This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure.This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).

1 Select [Expo. comp./AEB].Under the [2] tab, select [Expo. comp./AEB], then press <0>.

2 Set the AEB amount.Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB amount.Press the key to set the exposure compensation amount. If AEB is combined with exposure compensation, AEB will be applied centering on the exposure compensation amount.Press <0> to set it.When you press the <M> button to exit the menu, the AEB level will be displayed on the LCD monitor.

3 Take the picture.Focus and press the shutter button completely. The three bracketed shots will be taken in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure.

3 Auto Exposure BracketingN

Standard exposure Darker exposure(Decreased exposure)

Brighter exposure(Increased exposure)

AEB amountwww.devicemanuals.eu



Select [Expo. comp./AEB].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Expo. comp./AEB].

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2comp./AEB

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

comp./AEB

Set the AEB amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the AEB amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <


Brighter exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBrighter exposure

(Increased exposure)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Increased exposure)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


AEB amountwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AEB amount

3 Auto Exposure BracketingN

106

Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB amount display.The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power switch is set to <2>, flash recycling is completed, etc.

Using AEB with continuous shooting:If continuous shooting (p.88) has been set and you press the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure.Using AEB with single shooting.Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure.Using AEB with the self-timer or remote control (sold separately).With the self-timer or remote control (<Q> or <l>), you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay. With <q> (p.89) set, the number of continuous shots will be three times the number set.

Canceling AEB

Shooting Tips

Neither flash nor bulb exposures can be used with AEB.If [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the AEB’s effect might be minimal.


shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken

Standard exposure, decreased

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Standard exposure, decreased

Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following sequence: Standard exposure, decr

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

eased exposure, and increased

Using AEB with the self-timer or remote control (sold

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using AEB with the self-timer or remote control (sold


With the self-timer or remote control (<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With the self-timer or remote control (<three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay. With <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay. With <


(p.89) set, the number of continuous shots will be three times the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.89) set, the number of continuous shots will be three times the

107

You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects.

1 Focus the subject.Press the shutter button halfway.The exposure setting will be displayed.

2 Press the <A> button. (0)The <A> icon lights in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked (AE lock).Each time you press the <A> button, it locks the current autoexposure setting.

3 Recompose and take the picture.If you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots, hold down the <A> button and press the shutter button to take another shot.

* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the center AF point..

A Locking the ExposureN

AE Lock Effects

Metering Mode (p.102)

AF Point Selection Method (p.85)Automatic Selection Manual Selection

q*AE lock is applied at the AF point that achieved focus.

AE lock is applied at the selected AF point.

wre AE lock is applied at the center AF point.

www.devicemanuals.eu> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button. > icon lights in the viewfinder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon lights in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euto indicate that the exposure setting is locked (AE lock).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulocked (AE lock).Each time you press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Each time you press the <it locks the current autoexposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

it locks the current autoexposure setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

108

If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject may turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc. This is when you should use FE lock. After setting the proper flash exposure for the subject, you can recompose (put the subject toward the side) and shoot. This feature can also be used with a Canon EX-series Speedlite.* FE stands for Flash Exposure.

1 Press the <D> button.The built-in flash will rise.Press the shutter button halfway and look in the viewfinder to check that the <D> icon is lit.

2 Focus the subject.

3 Press the <A> button. (8)Aim the spot-metering circle over the subject, then press the <A> button.The flash will fire a preflash and the required flash output is calculated and retained in memory.In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed for a moment and <d> will light.Each time you press the <A> button, a preflash is fired and the required flash output is calculated and retained in memory.

4 Take the picture.Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.The flash is fired when the picture is taken.

A Locking the Flash ExposureN


If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash, the <D> icon will blink. Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.


Press the shutter button halfway and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway and look in the viewfinder to check that

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulook in the viewfinder to check that > icon is lit.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon is lit.Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFocus the subject.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <A

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AAim the spot-metering circle over the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aim the spot-metering circle over the subject, then press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject, then press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The flash will fire a preflash and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The flash will fire a preflash and the

109

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. This feature is called Auto Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG images, the correction is done when the image is captured. For RAW images, it can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302).

1 Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].Under the [2] tab, select [Auto Lighting Optimizer], then press <0>.

2 Select the setting.Select the desired setting, then press <0>.

3 Take the picture.The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if necessary.

3 Correcting the Brightness and Contrast AutomaticallyN

Without correction With correction

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable] and you cannot change this setting.Depending on the shooting conditions, noise might increase.If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation, flash exposure compensation, or manual exposure to darken the exposure, the image might still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set [Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] first.

In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.


Select the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired setting, then press

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

brightness and contrast corrected if necessary.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

necessary.




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

110

Due to the lens characteristics, the four corners of the picture might look darker. This phenomenon is called lens light fall-off or drop in peripheral illumination and can be corrected automatically. The default setting is [Enable]. With JPEG images, the correction is done when the image is captured. For RAW images, it can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302).

1 Select [Peripheral illumin. correct.].

Under the [1] tab, select [Peripheral illumin. correct.], then press <0>.

2 Select the setting.On the screen, check that [Correction data available] is displayed for the attached lens.If [Correction data not available] is displayed, see “About the Lens Correction Data” on the next page.Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3 Take the picture.The image will be recorded with the corrected peripheral illumination.

3 Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners

Correction enabledCorrection disabled


Peripheral illumin. correct.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPeripheral illumin. correct.

Select the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the setting.

On the screen, check that

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the screen, check that Correction data available

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Correction data availabledisplayed for the attached lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed for the attached lens.If [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If [Correction data not available

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Correction data not availabledisplayed, see “About the Lens

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed, see “About the Lens Correction Data” on the next page.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Correction Data” on the next page.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

3

111

3 Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners

The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction data for approx. 25 lenses. In step 2, if you select [Enable], the peripheral light correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data has been registered in the camera.With EOS Utility (provided software, p.302), you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, see the PDF Software Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility (p.305).

About the Lens Correction Data

For JPEG images already captured, lens peripheral illumination correction cannot be applied.Depending on shooting conditions, noise might appear on the image periphery.When using a non-Canon lens, setting the correction to [Disable] is recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.

Lens peripheral light correction is also applied when an Extender is attached.If the correction data for the attached lens has not been registered to the camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable].The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided software).If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will be lower.The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.


PDF Software Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility (p.305).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPDF Software Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility (p.305).


For JPEG images already captured, lens peripheral illumination

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For JPEG images already captured, lens peripheral illumination correction cannot be applied.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

correction cannot be applied.Depending on shooting conditions, noise might appear on the image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depending on shooting conditions, noise might appear on the image

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the correction to [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the correction to [www.devicemanuals.eu

recommended, even if [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

recommended, even if [

112

You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters like [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 114.

1 Press the <XA> button.

2 Select a Picture Style.Select a Picture Style, then press the <C> button.The Detail set. screen will appear.

3 Select a parameter.Select a parameter such as [Sharpness], then press <0>.

4 Set the parameter.Press the key to adjust the parameter as desired, then press <0>.

Press the <M> button to save the adjusted parameters. The Picture Style selection screen will reappear.Any parameter settings different from the default will be displayed in blue.

A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN


The Detail set. screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Detail set. screen will appear.

Select a parameter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect a parameter.

Select a parameter such as

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select a parameter such as Sharpness

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sharpness

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4 Set the parameter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the parameter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

113


SharpnessAdjusts the sharpness of the image.To make it less sharp, set it toward the E end. The closer it is to E, the softer the image will look.To make it sharper, set it toward the F end. The closer it is to F, the sharper the image will look.

ContrastAdjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is to G, the blander the image will look.To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to H, the crisper the image will look.

SaturationThe image’s color saturation can be adjusted.To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is to G, the more diluted the colors will look.To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to H, the bolder the colors will look.

Color toneThe skin tones can be adjusted.To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is to G, the redder the skin tone will look.To make the skin tone less red, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to H, the more yellow the skin tone will look.

Parameter Settings and Effects

By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective Picture Style to its default parameter settings.To shoot with the Picture Style you modified, follow step 2 on page 81 to select the modified Picture Style and then shoot.


Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.

rd the minus end. The closer it is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurd the minus end. The closer it is

the plus end. The closer it is to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu the plus end. The closer it is to

The image’s color saturation can be adjusted.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image’s color saturation can be adjusted.To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The , the more diluted the colors will look.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

, the more diluted the colors will look.To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The , the bolder the colors will look.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

, the bolder the colors will look.


The skin tones can be adjusted.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The skin tones can be adjusted.To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is to www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

closer it is to Gwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

G


114

For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding page.

kFilter EffectWith a filter effect applied to a monochrome image, you can make white clouds or green trees stand out more.

lToning EffectBy applying a toning effect, you can create a monochrome image in that color. It can make the image look more impressive.The following can be selected: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or [G:Green].

V Monochrome Adjustment

Filter Sample EffectsN: None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

Ye: Yellow The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look crisper.

Or: Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.

R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.

G: Green Skin tones and lips will look fine. Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter.

Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.www.devicemanuals.eu


Sample Effects

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSample Effects


Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.


The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look





The blue sky will look slightly dark

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The blue sky will look slightly dark


The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and


Skin tones and lips will look fine.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Skin tones and lips will look fine.brighter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

brighter.







Contrastwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Contrast

115

You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as sharpness and contrast are different. You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style which has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software, p.302).

1 Press the <XA> button.

2 Select [User Def.].Select [User Def. *], then press the <C> button.The Detail set. screen will appear.

3 Press <0>.With [Picture Style] selected, press <0>.

4 Select the base Picture Style.Press the <V> key to select the base Picture Style, then press <0>.To adjust the parameters of a Picture Style which has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software), select the Picture Style here.

A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN


Select [User Def.].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [User Def.].

User Def. *

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUser Def. *> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The Detail set. screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Detail set. screen will appear.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN

116

5 Select a parameter.Select a parameter such as [Sharpness], then press <0>.

6 Set the parameter.Press the key to adjust the parameter as desired, then press <0>. For details, see “Customizing Image Characteristics” on pages 112-114.

Press the <M> button to register the modified Picture Style. The Picture Style selection screen will then reappear.The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [User Def. *].

If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *], changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter settings of the registered Picture Style.If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.176), all the [User Def. *] settings will revert to the default. Any Picture Style registered via EOS Utility (provided software) will have only its modified parameters reverted to the default setting.

To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 81 to select [User Def. *] and then shoot.


parameter as desired, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euparameter as desired, then press

For details, see “C

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor details, see “Customizing Image

www.devic

eman

uals.

euustomizing Image Characteristics” on pages 112-114.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCharacteristics” on pages 112-114.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <M

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mthe modified Picture Style. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the modified Picture Style. The Picture Style selection screen will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style selection screen will then reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

then reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The base Picture Style will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

indicated on the right of [

117

The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the <Q> (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

1 Press the <WB> button.[White balance] will appear.

2 Select the white balance.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired white balance, then press <0>.The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin) displayed for the following white balance settings <W>, <E>, <R>, <Y> or is the respective color temperature.

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Do this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

1 Photograph a white object.The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.You can set any white balance.

B: Matching the Light SourceN

O Custom White Balance


www.devicemanuals.eu> key or turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the

> dial to select the desired white

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to select the desired white balance, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubalance, then press <The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin) displayed for the following white

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed for the following white balance settings <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

balance settings <<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<R

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

R>, <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, <respective color temperature.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

respective color temperature.


Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for bette

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

for a specific light source for bette



the actual light source to be used.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the actual light source to be used.www.devicemanuals.eu

Custom White Balance

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom White Balance

B: Matching the Light SourceN

118

2 Select [Custom White Balance].Under the [2] tab, select [Custom White Balance], then press <0>.The custom white balance selection screen will appear.

3 Import the white balance data.Select the image that was captured in step 1, then press <0>.On the dialog screen which appears, select [OK] and the data will be imported.When the menu reappears, press the <M> button to exit the menu.

4 Select the custom white balance.Press the <WB> button.Select [O], then press <0>.

If the exposure obtained in step 1 is way off, a correct white balance might not be obtained.An image captured while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome] (p.82) or an image processed with a Creative filter cannot be selected in step 3.

Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (provided software, p.302) will be registered under <O>. If you do step 3, the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased.

www.devicemanuals.eu0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

On the dialog screen which appears,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the dialog screen which appears,

] and the data will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] and the data will be

When the menu reappears, press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the menu reappears, press the M

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

M> button to exit the menu.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button to exit the menu.

Select the custom white balance.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the custom white balance.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

119

You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels.This is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature conversion or color compensating filters.

1 Select [WB Shift/BKT].Under the [2] tab, select [WB Shift/BKT], then press <0>.The WB correction/WB bracketing screen will appear.

2 Set the white balance correction.Press the <S> key to move the “ ” mark to the desired position.B is for blue, A is amber, M is magenta, and G is green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected.On the upper right, “Shift” indicates the direction and correction amount.Pressing the <C> button will cancel all the [WB Shift/BKT] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting and return to the menu.

2 Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN

White Balance Correction

Sample setting: A2, G1

During the white balance correction, <2> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)


] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0The WB correction/WB bracketing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe WB correction/WB bracketing screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euscreen will appear.

Set the white balance correction.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the white balance correction.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <mark to the desired position.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

mark to the desired position.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN

120

With just one shot, three images having a different color balance can be recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.

Set the white balance bracketing amount.In step 2 for white balance correction, when you turn the <6> dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will change to “ ” (3 points). Turning the dial to the right sets the B/A bracketing, and turning it to the left sets the M/G bracketing.On the right, “Bracket” indicates the bracketing direction and correction amount.Pressing the <C> button will cancel all the [WB Shift/BKT] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting and return to the menu.

Bracketing SequenceThe images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.

White Balance Auto Bracketing

B/A bias ±3 levels

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third the normal number.

You can also set white balance correction and AEB (p.105) together with white balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.Since three images are recorded for one shot, the card will take longer to record the shot.“BKT” stands for Bracketing.


6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6> dial, the “ ”

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial, the “ ”

mark on the screen will change to “ ”

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumark on the screen will change to “ ” (3 points). Turning the dial to the right sets

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(3 points). Turning the dial to the right sets the B/A bracketing, and turning it to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe B/A bracketing, and turning it to the left sets the M/G bracketing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euleft sets the M/G bracketing.On the right, “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

On the right, “bracketing direction and correction amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

bracketing direction and correction amount.Pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <all the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

all the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bracketing Sequence

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bracketing SequenceThe images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

121

The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this camera, you can set the color space to sRGB or Adobe RGB for captured images. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.

1 Select [Color space].Under the [2] tab, select [Color space], then press <0>.

2 Set the desired color space.Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then press <0>.

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you do not know about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21).The image will look very subdued in a sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). Post-processing of the image with software will therefore be required.

3 Setting the Color Reproduction RangeN

About Adobe RGB

If the image is captured with the color space set to Adobe RGB, the file name will start with “_MG_” (first character is an underscore).The ICC profile is not appended. See explanations about the ICC profile in the PDF Software Instruction Manual (p.305) on the CD-ROM.


] or [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] or [Adobe RGB

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdobe RGB

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses. This setting is not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

industrial uses. This setting is notabout image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21).The image will look very subdued

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image will look very subdued environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). Post-processing of the image with www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). Post-processing of the image with

122

The camera’s mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or close-up (macro) lens. In such cases, mirror lockup is effective.Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [8: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable] in the [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.255).

1 Focus the subject, then press the shutter button completely.The mirror will swing up.

2 Press the shutter button completely again.The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.After taking the picture, set [8: Mirror lockup] to [0: Disable].

Using the self-timer <Q> <l> with mirror lockup.When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up, then the picture is taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.Remote control shooting.Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote control shooting together with mirror lockup can further prevent camera shake (p.261). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button and the mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec. later.

Mirror Lock-up to Reduce Camera ShakeN

Shooting Tips

In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.If you use the self-timer and mirror lockup in combination with a bulb exposure, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken.

Even if (Continuous shooting) has been set, single shooting will take effect.If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the mirror again.


The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

8: Mirror lockup

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu8: Mirror lockup] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] to [0: Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0: Disable

> with mirror lockup.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> with mirror lockup.

When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up, then the picture is taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

then the picture is taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.

Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote


control shooting together with mi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

control shooting together with micamera shake (p.261). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera shake (p.261). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button and the mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec. later.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec. later.


In very bright light such as at twww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In very bright light such as at t

123

5Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

Live View shooting is effective for still subjects which do not move.If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images. Using a tripod is recommended.

About Remote Live View ShootingWith EOS Utility (provided software, p.302) installed in your computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, see the PDF Software Instruction Manual (p.305) on the CD-ROM.



Shooting with the LCD Monitor

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Live View Shooting)You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

Live View shooting is effective for still subjects which do

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Live View shooting is effective for still subjects which do

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the


LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images. Using a tripod is recommended.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using a tripod is recommended.

124

1 Display the Live View image.Press the <A> button.The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.The Live View image will closely reflect the brightness level of the actual image you capture.

2 Focus the subject.When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with the current AF mode (p.131-137).

3 Take the picture.Press the shutter button completely.The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor.After the image review ends, the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically.Press the <A> button to exit Live View shooting.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

The image’s field of view is approx. 99% (when the image-recording quality is set to JPEG 73).The metering mode will be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View shooting.In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also be applied to subsequent shots.Using <8> will be the same as using <d>.You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.261) for Live View shooting.


When you press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhalfway, the camera will focus with the current AF mode (p.131-137).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe current AF mode (p.131-137).

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.Press the shutter button completely.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button completely.The picture will be taken and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

125


Set [Live View shoot.] to [Enable].

In Basic Zone modes, [Live View shoot.] will be displayed under [2], and in Creative Zone modes, it will be displayed under [z].

Battery Life with Live View Shooting [Approx. number of shots]

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, continuous Live View shooting is possible as for approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 23°C / 73°F.

Enabling Live View Shooting

TemperatureShooting Conditions

No Flash 50% Flash UseAt 23°C / 73°F 200 180At 0°C / 32°F 170 150

During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 139-140.

When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot will be taken.If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn off automatically as set with [5 Auto power off] (p.167). If [5 Auto power off] is set to [Off], the Live View function will terminate automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).With the AV cable (provided) or HDMI cable (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a TV (p.218, 221).


[Approx. number of shots]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[Approx. number of shots]

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 and CIPA

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8,possible as for approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 23°C / 73°F.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

possible as for approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 23°C / 73°F.

www.devicemanuals.euShooting Conditions

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting ConditionsNo Flash 50% Flash Use

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNo Flash 50% Flash Use


180

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu180








126


Each time you press the <C> button, the information display will change.

About the Information Display

Magnifying frame

ISO speed

Exposure level indicator/AEB range

Aperture

Shutter speedPicture Style

Battery check

Exposure simulation

Image-recordingquality

White balance

y Flash exposurecompensation

0 External flash exposurecompensation

AF point (Quick mode)

FEB

AEB


Histogram

Drive mode

AE lockr Flash-ready

b Flash off

Auto LightingOptimizer

AF mode• d : Live mode• c : Face detection Live mode• f : Quick mode

Possible shots

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Shooting mode

Built-in flashfunction

When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is not being displayed at the suitable brightness due to low- or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.If flash is used or bulb is set, the <g> icon and histogram will be grayed out (for your reference). The histogram might not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash exposurecompensation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation External flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

External flash exposurecompensationwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

compensationwww.devicemanuals.eu

127


The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., in the Live View image so you can see what the captured image will look like.During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below.

Final image simulation during Live View shootingPicture Style* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone

will be reflected.White balanceWhite balance correctionShoot by ambience selectionShoot by lighting or scene typeExposureDepth of field (With depth-of-field preview button ON)Auto Lighting OptimizerPeripheral illumination correctionHighlight tone priorityAspect ratio (Image area confirmation)

Final Image Simulation


* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone

Depth of field (With depth-of-field preview button ON)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depth of field (With depth-of-field preview button ON)

Peripheral illumination correction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Peripheral illumination correctionHighlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation)

128

Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here.

While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor in Creative Zone modes, pressing the <Q> button will enable you to set the AF mode, drive mode, white balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, image-recording quality, and built-in flash settings. In Basic Zone modes, you can set the AF mode and the settings shown in the table on page 64.

1 Press the <Q> button.The functions settable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the screen.If the AF mode is <f>, the AF points will also be displayed. You can also select the AF point.

2 Select a function and set it.Press the <V> key to select a function.The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will appear.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to change the setting. Pressing <0> will display the respective function’s setting screen.

Shooting Function Settings

Q Quick Control

In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the <Z> button.


> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The functions settable with Quick

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe functions settable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euControl will appear on the left of the

If the AF mode is <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the AF mode is <points will also be displayed. You can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

points will also be displayed. You can also select the AF point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

also select the AF point.

Select a function and set it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

129

The menu options below are displayed.

In Basic Zone modes, the Live View menu options will be displayed under [2], and in Creative Zone modes, they will be displayed under [z].

Live View shootingYou can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].AF modeYou can select [Live mode] (p.131), [u Live mode] (p.132), or [Quick mode] (p.136).Grid displayWith [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally.Aspect ratioNThe image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1]. The following aspect ratios will be indicated with lines on the Live View image: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.RAW images will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the RAW image with the provided software. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1] aspect ratios, the aspect-ratio lines will appear during image playback, but the lines are not actually drawn on the image.

z Menu Function Settings

The settings for these menu options will apply only to Live View shooting. They do not take effect during viewfinder shooting.

www.devicemanuals.euLive mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

euLive mode

], you can display grid lines. It can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], you can display grid lines. It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

help you level the camera vertically or horizontally.

The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [The following aspect ratios will be indicated with lines on the Live

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The following aspect ratios will be indicated with lines on the Live 16:9

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

16:9] [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] [1:1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1:1


JPEG images will be saved

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

JPEG images will be saved RAW images will always be saved with the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RAW images will always be saved with the [the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you

130

z Menu Function Settings

Metering timerNYou can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time). This option is not displayed in Basic Zone modes. (Metering timer is fixed at 16 sec.)

QualityAspect Ratio and Pixel Count

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:13 5184x3456

(18.0 megapixels)4608x3456

(16.0 megapixels)5184x2912*


(11.9 megapixels)1

43456x2304




(5.3 megapixels)

a2592x1728




(3.0 megapixels)

b1920x1280




(1.6 megapixels)

c720x480

(350,000 pixels)640x480

(310,000 pixels)720x400*

(290,000 pixels)480x480

(230,000 pixels)

Asterisked image-recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect ratio.The image area displayed for asterisked image-recording qualities is slightly larger than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor when shooting.If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images might not be correctly printed.

If you select [y Dust Delete Data], [6 Sensor cleaning], [7 Clear settings], or [7 Firmware Ver.], the Live View shooting will terminate.


(2.1 megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(2.1 megapixels)

720x400*

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu720x400*(290,000 pixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(290,000 pixels)






Asterisked image-recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAsterisked image-recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect

The image area displayed for asterisked image-recording qualities is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image area displayed for asterisked image-recording qualities is


slightly larger than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

slightly larger than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the

If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this


You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time). This option is not displawww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

time). This option is not displatimer is fixed at 16 sec.)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

timer is fixed at 16 sec.)www.devicemanuals.eu

camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images might not be correctly printed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images might not be correctly printed.

131

The AF modes available are [Live mode], [u Live mode] (face detection, p.132), and [Quick mode] (p.136).If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to <MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.138).

Select the AF mode.Under the [z] tab, select [AF mode] ([2] tab in Basic Zone modes).Select the desired AF mode, then press <0>.While the Live View image is displayed, you can press the <Q> button to select the AF mode on the Quick Control screen (p.128).

The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the Live View image displayed, the AF operation will take longer than with the Quick mode. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than with the Quick mode.

1 Display the Live View image.Press the <A> button.The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.The AF point < > will appear.

2 Move the AF point.Press the <S> key to move the AF point to where you want to focus (it cannot go to the edges of the picture).To return the AF point to the center, press the <0> or <L> button.

Changing the Autofocus Mode

Selecting the AF Mode

Live Mode: d

AF point


] tab in Basic Zone modes).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab in Basic Zone modes).

Select the desired AF mode, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired AF mode, then >.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.While the Live View image is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile the Live View image is displayed, you can press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed, you can press the <button to select the AF mode on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button to select the AF mode on the Quick Control screen (p.128).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control screen (p.128).

The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the Live View image displayed,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Live View image displayed, with the Quick mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with the Quick mode. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than




with the Quick mode.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with the Quick mode.

132


3 Focus the subject.Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

4 Take the picture.Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.124).

With the same AF method as the Live mode, human faces are detected and focused. Have the target person face the camera.

1 Display the Live View image.Press the <A> button.The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.When a face is detected, the frame will appear over the face to be focused.If multiple faces are detected, <q> will be displayed. Press the key to move the <q> frame over the desired target face.

u (Face detection) Live Mode: c

www.devicemanuals.euCheck the focus and exposure, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCheck the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupress the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.124).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutake the picture (p.124).

With the same AF method as the Live mode, human faces are detected

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With the same AF method as the Live mode, human faces are detected



and focused. Have the target person face the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and focused. Have the target person face the camera.

1www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

1www.devicemanuals.eu

(Face detection) Live Mode:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Face detection) Live Mode:


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

133


2 Focus the subject.Press the shutter button halfway and the camera will focus the face covered by the frame.When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.If a face cannot be detected, the AF point < > will be displayed and AF will be executed at the center.


If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to <f>, turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus. The face will then be detected and will be displayed.An object other than a human face might be detected as a face.Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture, too bright or too dark, titled horizontally or diagonally, or partially hidden.The focusing frame might cover only part of the face.

When you press the <0> or <L> button, the AF mode will switch to the Live mode (p.131). You can press the <S> key to move the AF point. Press the <0> or <L> button again to return to the u (face detection) Live mode.Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture, the will be grayed out. Then if you press the shutter button halfway, the center AF point < > will be used to focus.


If a face cannot be detected, the AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf a face cannot be detected, the AF point < > will be displayed and AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupoint < > will be displayed and AF will be executed at the center.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill be executed at the center.Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCheck the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.124).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

take the picture (p.124).


If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to >, turn the focusing ring to attain

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, turn the focusing ring to attain detected and <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

detected and <www.devicemanuals.eu

pwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

pAn object other than a human face might be detected as a face.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

An object other than a human face might be detected as a face.

134


AF operationFocusing will take slightly longer.Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again.The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation.If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed, the screen might flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens, stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source first.If you press the button in the Live mode, the image will be magnified at the AF point. If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views.If you autofocus in the Live mode’s normal view and then magnify the image, the focus might be off.In the u Live mode, pressing the button will not magnify the image.

Live Mode and u (Face Detection) Live Mode Notes

In the Live mode or u (face detection) Live mode, if you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the center AF point over the subject to focus, then take the picture.The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with a LED light is used, the LED light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary in the Live mode and u (face detection) Live mode.


happens, stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhappens, stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the

> button in the Live mode, the image will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button in the Live mode, the image will be is difficult in the magnified view,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis difficult in the magnified view,

return to the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

return to the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

may differ between the normal and magnified views.If you autofocus in the Live mode’s normal view and then magnify

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you autofocus in the Live mode’s normal view and then magnify the image, the focus might be off.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the image, the focus might be off. Live mode, pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Live mode, pressing the <

135


Shooting conditions which can make focusing difficult:Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid-color, flat surfaces.Subjects in low light.Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.Night scenes or points of light.Under fluorescent lighting or when the image flickers.Extremely small subjects.Subjects at the edge of the picture.Subjects strongly reflecting light.The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an animal in a cage).Subjects which keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still due to camera shake or subject blur.A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.Autofocusing while the subject is way out of focus.Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.A special effects filter is used.


and faraway subject (such as an

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand faraway subject (such as an

Subjects which keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Subjects which keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still due to camera shake or subject blur.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

still due to camera shake or subject blur.A subject approaching or movi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ng away from the camera.Autofocusing while the subject is way out of focus.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Autofocusing while the subject is way out of focus.Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.A special effects filter is used.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A special effects filter is used.

136


The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF mode (p.83), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View image will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.

1 Display the Live View image.Press the <A> button.The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.The small boxes on the screen are the AF points, and the larger box is the magnifying frame.

2 Select the AF point. NPress the <Q> button (7) to display the Quick Control screen.The settable functions will be displayed on the left of the screen.Press the <V> key to make the AF point selectable.Turn the <6> dial to select the AF point.

Quick Mode: f

AF point

Magnifying frame

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe small boxes on the screen are

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe small boxes on the screen are the AF points, and the larger box is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe AF points, and the larger box is the magnifying frame.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe magnifying frame.

Select the AF point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the AF point. Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <display the Quick Control screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

display the Quick Control screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The settable functions will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The settable functions will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

137


3 Focus the subject.Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.The Live View image will turn off, the reflex mirror will go back down, and AF will be executed.When focus is achieved, the AF point which achieved focus will turn green and the Live View image will reappear.If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange and blink.


You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the Live View image is displayed.

www.devicemanuals.euIf focus is not achieved, the AF point

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange and blink.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill turn orange and blink.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.124).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

take the picture (p.124).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

138

You can magnify the image and focus precisely manually.

1 Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF>.

Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly.

2 Move the magnifying frame.Press the <S> key to move the magnifying frame to the position where you want to focus.To return the magnifying frame to the center, press the <0> or <L> button.

3 Magnify the image.Press the button.The area within the magnifying frame will be magnified.Each time you press the button, the view will change as follows:

4 Focus manually.While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus.After achieving focus, press the button to return to the normal view.

5 Take the picture.Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button to take the picture (p.124).

MF: Focusing Manually

Magnifying frame

AE lock

Magnified area position

Magnification

5x 10x Normal view


magnifying frame to the position

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumagnifying frame to the position where you want to focus.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwhere you want to focus.To return the magnifying frame to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo return the magnifying frame to the center, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucenter, press the <

Magnify the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Magnify the image.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The area within the magnifying frame

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The area within the magnifying frame will be magnified.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will be magnified.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

139

Live View Shooting CautionsWhite <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live View shooting or a high ambient temperature, a white <s> icon will appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed, the image quality of still photos may deteriorate. You should stop the Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white <s> icon is displayed, a red <E> icon will start blinking. This blinking icon is a warning that the Live View shooting will soon be terminated automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.Shooting with the Live View function at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the <s> and <E> icons to appear earlier. When not shooting, turn off the camera.

Live View Image CautionsUnder low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image might not reflect the brightness of the captured image.If the light source within the image changes, the screen might flicker. If this happens, stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual light source to be used.If you point the camera in a different direction, it might throw off the Live View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.If there is a very bright light source in the picture, such as the sun, the bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image will correctly show the bright area.In low light, if you set the [6 LCD brightness] to a bright setting, chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However, the chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image.When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced than it really is.


icon is a warning that the Live View shooting will soon be terminated

www.devic

eman

uals.

euicon is a warning that the Live View shooting will soon be terminated automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautomatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucamera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the

Shooting with the Live View function at a high temperature for a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting with the Live View function at a high temperature for a

> and <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> and <E

www.devic

eman

uals.

euE

When not shooting, turn off the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When not shooting, turn off the camera.

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image might not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image might not reflect the brightness of the captured image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

reflect the brightness of the captured image.If the light source within the image changes, the screen might flicker. If

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the light source within the image changes, the screen might flicker. If this happens, stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

this happens, stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual light source to be used.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the actual light source to be used.If you point the camera in a different direction, it might throw off the Live

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you point the camera in a different direction, it might throw off the Live View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

level stabilizes before shooting.If there is a very bright light source www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

If there is a very bright light source

140

Live View Shooting CautionsShooting Result Cautions

When you shoot continuously with the Live View function for a long period, the camera’s internal temperature may increase and it can degrade image quality. Terminate Live View shooting when not shooting images.Before taking a long exposure, stop Live View shooting temporarily and wait several minutes before shooting. This is to prevent image degradation.Live View shooting in high temperatures and at high ISO speeds may cause noise or irregular colors.When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.) may become noticeable.If you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. During the magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in orange. Even if you take the picture during magnified view, the image will be captured in the normal view.If [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is not set to [Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set.If you use a TS-E lens to shift the lens vertically or use an Extension Tube, the standard exposure might not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.

Custom Function CautionsDuring Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take effect (p.251).

Lens and Flash CautionsThe focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used.FE lock is not possible when the built-in flash or an external Speedlite is used. Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euatures and at high ISO speeds may

www.devic

eman

uals.

euatures and at high ISO speeds may

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.)

If you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucome out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. During the magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During the magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in orange. Even if you take the picture during magnified view,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed in orange. Even if you take the picture during magnified view, the image will be captured in the normal view.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the image will be captured in the normal view.Auto Lighting Optimizer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is not set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] (p.109) is not set to [image may look bright even if a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

decreased flash exposure compensation has been set.If you use a TS-E lens to shift the lens vertically or use an Extension

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you use a TS-E lens to shift the lens vertically or use an Extension Tube, the standard exposure might not be obtained or an irregular

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Tube, the standard exposure might not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

exposure may result.


Custom Function Cautionswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom Function CautionsDuring Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take

141

6Shooting Movies

Set the Mode Dial to <k> to shoot movies. The movie recording format will be MOV.

Cards which can record moviesWhen shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD Speed Class 6 “ ” or higher.If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie might not be recorded properly. And if you playback a movie on a card having a slow reading speed, the movie might not playback properly.To check the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site.

About Full HD 1080Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning lines).


www.devicemanuals.euShooting Movies

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting Movies


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the Mode Dial to <shoot movies. The movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shoot movies. The movie recording format will be MOV.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

recording format will be MOV.




Cards which can record movieswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cards which can record moviesWhen shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD

142

Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to playback the movies shot (p.218, 221).

1 Set the Mode Dial to <k>.The reflex mirror will make a sound, then the image will appear on the LCD monitor.

2 Focus the subject.Before shooting a movie, autofocus or manual focus (p.131-138).When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with the current AF mode.

3 Shoot the movie.Press the <A> button to start shooting a movie. To stop movie shooting, press <A> again.While the movie is being shot, the “o” mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen.

k Shooting Movies

Autoexposure Shooting

Recording movie

Microphone

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBefore shooting a movie, autofocus

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBefore shooting a movie, autofocus or manual focus (p.131-138).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euor manual focus (p.131-138).When you press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhalfway, the camera will focus with the current AF mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the current AF mode.

Shoot the movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shoot the movie.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <shooting a movie. To stop movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting a movie. To stop movie shooting, press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting, press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








Recording movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recording movie

143

k Shooting Movies

This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light automatically in low-light conditions during autoexposure shooting. For details, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately) Equipped with a LED Light

During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 163 and 164.If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages 139 and 140.

The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture are set automatically.AE lock is possible by pressing the <A> button (p.107). To cancel AE lock during movie shooting, press the <S> button.By holding down the <O> button and turning the <6> dial, you can set the exposure compensation.Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (p.146) on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a still photo.On the shooting information display (p.227), if you playback a movie shot with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture will not be displayed. The image information (Exif) will record the settings used at the start of the movie shooting.


> button and turning the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button and turning the <

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed, aperture,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed, aperture,



This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light automatically in low-www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

automatically in low-details, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

details, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.www.devicemanuals.eu

Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately) Equipped with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately) Equipped with

www.devicemanuals.euand ISO speed (p.146) on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand ISO speed (p.146) on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure

On the shooting information display (p.227), if you playback a movie shot

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the shooting information display (p.227), if you playback a movie shot with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture will not be displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture will not be displayed. The image information (Exif) will record

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image information (Exif) will record

k Shooting Movies

144

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <k>.The reflex mirror will make a sound, then the image will appear on the LCD monitor.

2 Select [Movie exposure].Press the <M> button and under the [n] tab, select [Movie exposure], then press <0>.

3 Select [Manual].Select [Manual], then press <0>.

4 Set the shutter speed and aperture.

To set the shutter speed, turn the <6> dial. The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate <9>.• 8 / 7 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.• 6 / 5 / 4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.To set the aperture, hold down the <O> button and turn the <6> dial.

5 Set the ISO speed.Press the <Z> button and press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the ISO speed.• [AUTO] setting : ISO 100 - 6400• Manual ISO setting : ISO 100 - 6400

Manual Exposure Shooting

<6><O> + <6>

www.devicemanuals.euSelect [Movie exposure].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Movie exposure].M

www.devic

eman

uals.

euM> button and under

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button and under ] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexposure], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

Select [Manual].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Manual].Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [


Manual

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Manual

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4 Set the shutter speed and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the shutter speed and aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

aperture.

145

k Shooting Movies

6 Focus and shoot the movie.The procedure is the same as steps 2 and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting” (p.142).

AE lock and exposure compensation cannot be set.Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.If you use a lens whose maximum aperture changes while you zoom, you should not zoom while shooting a movie. Changes in the exposure may be recorded.If you shoot a movie under fluorescent lighting, the movie image might flicker.

With ISO Auto, the standard movie exposure will usually be obtained even if the light level changes.When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.



AE lock and exposure compensation cannot be set.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AE lock and exposure compensation cannot be set.Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not

k Shooting Movies

146

Each time you press the <C> button, the information display will change.

* When an Eye-Fi card has been inserted in the camera, the Eye-Fi transmission status (p.265) will be displayed.

About the Information Display

Movie shooting remaining time/Elapsed time

Recording movie

Magnifying frameAF point (Quick mode)

Exposure modeL:AutoexposureK:Manual exposure

ISO speed

Exposure compensation amount

Aperture

AE lock

White balance

Movie recording size


Shutter speed

Auto LightingOptimizer

AF mode• d : Live mode• c : Face detection Live

mode• f : Quick mode

Battery check

Picture Style

Movie shootingmode

LED light

Digital zoom magnification

Rec. level: Manual

Video snapshot

Possible shots


Frame rate

Video snapshotshooting duration

If there is no card in the camera, the movie shooting remaining time will be displayed in red.When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will change to the elapsed time.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



LED light

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

LED light




Frame ratewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Frame ratewww.devicemanuals.eu

147

k Shooting Movies

The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., in the movie image so you can see what the captured movie will look like.During movie shooting, the movie image will automatically reflect the settings listed below.

Final image simulation for movie shootingPicture Style* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone

will be reflected.White balanceExposureDepth of fieldAuto Lighting OptimizerPeripheral illumination correctionHighlight tone priority

Final Image Simulation

Notes for Both Autoexposure and Manual Exposure ShootingA movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie.The image’s field of view is approx. 99%.The sound will be recorded by the camera’s built-in monaural microphone (p.142).Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external microphone (commercially available) equipped with a stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.18).Movie-related settings are under the [n], [o], and [Z] menu tabs (p.157).With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the total shooting time will be as follows: At 23°C/73°F: Approx. 1 hr. 40 min., At 0°C/32°F: Approx. 1 hr. 20 min.


With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the total shooting time will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the total shooting time will be


The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., in the movie image so you can see what the captured

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

balance, etc., in the movie image so you can see what the captured

During movie shooting, the movie im

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During movie shooting, the movie im

Final image simulation for movie shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Final image simulation for movie shootingPicture Style

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone www.devicemanuals.eu. 40 min., At 0°C/32°F: Approx. 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu. 40 min., At 0°C/32°F: Approx. 1

k Shooting Movies

148

While shooting a movie, you can also take a still photo by pressing the shutter button completely.

Shooting Stills in the <k> ModeIf you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed.The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.Functions particular to still shooting are shown below. Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting.

Shooting Still Photos

Function Settings

Image-recording qualityAs set in [1 Quality].When the movie-recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect ratio will be 4:3.

Exposure setting

• Autoexposure shooting: Shutter speed and aperture automatically set (displayed when pressing the shutter button halfway).

• Manual exposure shooting: Shutter speed and aperture manually set.

AEB CanceledDrive mode Single shooting (Self-timer not possible)Flash Flash off


shooting, the movie will record

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushooting, the movie will record

The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is

The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the

Functions particular to still shooting are shown below. Other

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Functions particular to still shooting are shown below. Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

functions will be the same as for movie shooting.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image-recording qualityAs set in [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

As set in [When the movie-recording size is [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the movie-recording size is [[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[1280x720

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1280x720

149

Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here.

While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the <Q> button to set the AF mode, white balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, image-recording quality (for still photos), movie-recording size, movie digital zoom, and video snapshots.

1 Press the <Q> button. (7)The functions settable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the screen.If the AF mode is <f>, the AF point will also be displayed.

2 Select a function and set it.Press the <V> key to select a function.The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will appear.Press the key or turn the <6> dial to change the setting. Pressing <0> will display the respective function’s setting screen.

Shooting Function Settings

Q Quick Control

The image-recording quality setting will be reflected in all shooting modes.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe functions settable with Quick

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe functions settable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euControl will appear on the left of the

If the AF mode is <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the AF mode is <point will also be displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupoint will also be displayed.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

150

Under the [o] tab, [Movie rec. size] enables you to select the movie’s image size [****x****] and frame rate [9] (frames recorded per second). The 9 (frame rate) switches automatically depending on the [6 Video system] setting.

Image size[1920x1080] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.[1280x720] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.[640x480] : Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect

ratio will be 4:3.

Frame rate (fps: frames per second)[8] [6] : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North

America, Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).[7] [5] : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe,

Russia, China, Australia, etc.).[4] : Mainly for motion pictures.

3 Setting the Movie-recording Size

When [1920x1080] is set as movie recording size, you can use the digital zoom. For the setting procedure, see page 152.


] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.

] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.] : Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] : Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect

] : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America, Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

America, Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).] : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Russia, China, Australia, etc.).


] : Mainly for motion pictures.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] : Mainly for motion pictures.

151

3 Setting the Movie-recording Size

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per MinuteDue to limitations of the file system, movie shooting will stop automatically if the file size of a single movie clip reaches 4GB. To resume movie shooting, press the <A> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)

Movie-recording Size

Total Recording Time (approx.) File Size (approx.)4GB Card 8GB Card 16GB Card

[1920x1080]6

11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.5

4

[1280x720]8

11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.7

[640x480]6

46 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 MB/min.5

An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table above (p.163).The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. Depending on the subject and the increase in the camera’s internal temperature, the movie shooting might stop sooner than 29 min. 59 sec.

With ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software, p.302), you can extract still photos from a movie. The still image quality will be as follows: Approx. 2.1 megapixels at [1920x1080], approx. 920,000 pixels at [1280x720], and approx. 310,000 pixels at [640x480].

www.devicemanuals.eu11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.




46 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu46 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 MB/min.

152

When the image size is set to [1920x1080] (Full HD), you can shoot with an approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom.

1 Select [1920x1080 9].Under the [o] tab, set [Movie rec. size] to [1920x1080 9] by turning the <6> dial.

2 Set the digital zoom.Press the key to select [ ], then press <0>.Press the <M> button to exit the menu and return to movie shooting.

3 Use digital zoom.While holding down the button, press the (zoom in) or (zoom out) button.In step 2, you can cancel digital zoom by selecting [OFF].

3 Using Movie Digital Zoom

Using a tripod is recommended to prevent camera shake.The image cannot be magnified for focusing.Even if the AF mode has been set to [Quick mode], it will switch automatically to [Live mode] during movie shooting. Also, in [Live mode], the AF point is displayed larger than with other recording sizes.Since the image is processed digitally when using the digital zoom, the higher the zoom magnification, the rougher it will look.If you use digital zoom, noise and light spots may be more visible.Focusing may be difficult if the AF point covers both a near and far subject.Still photo shooting is not possible.

www.devicemanuals.euM

www.devic

eman

uals.

euM> button to exit the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to exit the menu and return to movie shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumenu and return to movie shooting.

Use digital zoom.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUse digital zoom.

While holding down the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

While holding down the <button, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button, press the (zoom out) button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> (zoom out) button.


In step 2, you can c

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In step 2, you can cby selecting [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

by selecting [

153

You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function.A video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. A collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot album and can be saved to the card as a single movie file. By changing the scene or angle in each video snapshot, you can create dynamic short movies.A video snapshot album can also be played together with background music (p.156, 213).

In step 2 below, you can select [2 sec. movie] for example, and each video snapshot you shoot will be 2 sec. long.

1 Select [Video snapshot].Under the [o] tab, select [Video snapshot].

2 Select the [Video snapshot] shooting duration.

Press the <V> key to select the video snapshot shooting duration, then press <0>.Press the <M> button to exit the menu and return to movie shooting,

3 Taking Video Snapshots

Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration

Video Snapshot Album Concept

Video snapshot album

Video snapshot 1

Video snapshot 2

Video snapshot x












www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Video snapshot albumVideo snapshot album

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


snapshot x

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusnapshot x


In step 2 below, you can select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In step 2 below, you can select [2 sec. movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 sec. movievideo snapshot you shoot will be 2 sec. long.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

video snapshot you shoot will be 2 sec. long.

1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1


o Snapshot Shooting Duration

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o Snapshot Shooting Duration



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

154

3 Shoot the first video snapshot.Press the <A> button to shoot.The blue bars indicating the shooting duration will gradually decrease. After the set shooting duration elapses, the shooting stops automatically.After the LCD monitor turns off and the access lamp stops blinking, the confirmation screen will appear.

4 Save as a video snapshot album.Press the key to select [ Save as album], then press <0>.The movie clip will be saved as the video snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

5 Continue to shoot more video snapshots.

Repeat step 3 to shoot the next video snapshot.Press the key to select [ Add to album], then press <0>.To create another video snapshot album, select [W Save as a new album].

6 Quit the video snapshot shooting.Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable]. To return to normal movie shooting, be sure to set [Disable].Press the <M> button to exit the menu and return to normal movie shooting,

Creating a Video Snapshot Album

Shooting duration


the access lamp stops blinking, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe access lamp stops blinking, the confirmation screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconfirmation screen will appear.

Save as a video snapshot album.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSave as a video snapshot album.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the key to select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select [

Save as album

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Save as albumThe movie clip will be saved as the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The movie clip will be saved as the video snapshot album’s first video

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

video snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

snapshot.

5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

5 Continue to shoot more video

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Continue to shoot more video snapshots.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

snapshots.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

155


Options in Steps 4 and 5

[Playback video snapshot] Operations

* With [Skip backward/Skip forward], the skipping duration will correspond to the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec.).

Option Description

Save as album (Step 4) The movie clip will be saved as the video snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

Add to album (Step 5) The video snapshot just recorded will be added to the album recorded immediately before.

WSave as a new album (Step 5)

A new video snapshot album is created and the movie clip is saved as the first video snapshot. The new album will be a different file from the previously recorded album.

1 Playback video snapshot (Steps 4 and 5)

The video snapshot just recorded will be played. For playback operations, see the table below.

Do not save to album (Step 4)Delete without saving to album (Step 5)

If you want to delete the video snapshot you just recorded and not save it to the album, select [OK].

Operation Playback Description2 Exit Returns to the previous screen.

7 Play By pressing <0>, you can play or pause the just-recorded video snapshot.

5 First frame Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.

Skip backward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back by a few seconds.

3 Previous frame Each time you press <0>, a single previous frame is displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.

Skip forward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips forward by a few seconds.

4 Last frame Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 VolumeYou can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.210) sound volume by turning the <6> dial.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



The video snapshot just recorded will be played.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe video snapshot just recorded will be played. For playback operations, see the table below.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor playback operations, see the table below.

www.devicemanuals.euIf you want to delete the video snapshot you

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you want to delete the video snapshot you just recorded and not save it to the album,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eujust recorded and not save it to the album,

OK

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu].


Playback Description

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Playback Description


Returns to the previous screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Returns to the previous screen.






By pressing <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

By pressing <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0recorded video snapshot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

recorded video snapshot.


Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.


Skip backward*

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Skip backward*


Each time you press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Each time you press <by a few seconds.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

by a few seconds.



Previous framewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Previous framewww.devicemanuals.eu

156

You can playback a completed album in the same way as a normal movie. For details, see pages 212 and 217.

Press the <x> button.Press the key to select an album, then press <0>.Movies shot as a video snapshot will have an < > icon on the screen’s upper left.

Playing an Album

You can add to an album only video snapshots having the same duration (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each). If you stop shooting a video snapshot before the set shooting duration elapses, the video snapshot will be added to the preceding album. And a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.• Changing the [Movie rec. size] (p.150).• Changing the [Video snapshot] shooting duration (p.153).• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto/Manual] to [Disable] or

from [Disable] to [Auto/Manual] (p.160).• Opening/closing the card slot cover or battery compartment cover.• Interrupting the use of AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately).• Updating the firmware.You cannot change the order of the video snapshots in an album or add more video snapshots to the album later.You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate. Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during playback might not be exact.

Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.To play background music, you must first copy the background music from the EOS Solution Disk (provided) to the card. For the copying procedure, see the PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.

Provided Software Usable with Albums • EOS Utility: By copying background music to the card, you can play

background music together with the playback of albums, normal movies, and slide shows on the camera.

• ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser: The edition of albums is possible.


• Opening/closing the card slot cover or battery compartment cover.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• Opening/closing the card slot cover or battery compartment cover.• Interrupting the use of AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• Interrupting the use of AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately).

You cannot change the order of the video snapshots in an album or add

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou cannot change the order of the video snapshots in an album or add

You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate. Depending on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate. Depending on the


You can playback a completed album in the same way as a normal

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can playback a completed album in the same way as a normal movie. For details, see pages 212 and 217.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movie. For details, see pages 212 and 217.



frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during playback might not be exact.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during playback might not be exact.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

157

The menu options displayed under the [n], [o], and [Z] tabs are explained below.

[n] tab

Movie exposureNormally, set this to [Auto].Setting it to [Manual] enables you to manually set the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture for movie shooting (p.144).AF modeThe AF modes will be the same as described on pages 131-137. You can select [Live mode], [u Live mode], or [Quick mode]. Note that continuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible.AF with shutter button during k (movie recording)When [Enable] is set, AF is possible during movie shooting. However, continuous autofocusing is not possible. If you autofocus during movie shooting, you might momentarily throw the focus way off or change the exposure. The movie will also record the lens operation noise.If the AF mode is set to [Quick mode], AF will be executed in [Live mode].

3 Menu Function Settings

The settings under the [n/o/Z] menu tabs will take effect only in the <k> mode. They will not be applied in shooting modes other than the <k> mode.The AF mode setting will also be applied to Live View shooting.

www.devicemanuals.eu] enables you to manually set the ISO speed,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] enables you to manually set the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture for movie shooting (p.144).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushutter speed, and aperture for movie shooting (p.144).

The AF modes will be the same as described on pages 131-137.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The AF modes will be the same as described on pages 131-137. ], [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], [u

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

u Live mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Live modethat continuous focusing of a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

that continuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

moving subject is not possible.


AF with shutter button during

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF with shutter button during ] is set, AF is possible during movie shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, AF is possible during movie shooting. However, continuous autofocusing is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

However, continuous autofocusing isduring movie shooting, you might momentarily throw the focus way

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

during movie shooting, you might momentarily throw the focus way


off or change the exposure. The movie will also record the lens www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

off or change the exposure. The movie will also record the lens operation noise.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

operation noise.

158

kShutter/AE lock buttonYou can change the function assigned to the shutter button’s halfway position and to the AE lock button.• AF/AE lock:

Normal function. Press the shutter button halfway to execute AF. Press the <w> button for AE lock.

• AE lock/AF:Press the shutter button halfway for AE lock. For AF, press the <w> button. Convenient when you want to focus and meter at different parts of the picture.

• AF/AF lock, no AE lock:Press the shutter button halfway to execute AF. While holding down the <w> button, press the shutter button to take a still photo without executing AF. Convenient when you do not want to autofocus when taking a still photo during movie shooting. AE lock is not possible.

• AE/AF, no AE lock:Press the shutter button halfway for metering. For AF, press the <w> button. AE lock is not possible.

www.devicemanuals.euPress the shutter button halfway to execute AF. While holding

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway to execute AF. While holding > button, press the shutter button to take a still photo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button, press the shutter button to take a still photo

without executing AF. Convenient when you do not want to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwithout executing AF. Convenient when you do not want to autofocus when taking a still photo during movie shooting. AE lock

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

autofocus when taking a still photo during movie shooting. AE lock


Press the shutter button halfway for metering. For AF, press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button halfway for metering. For AF, press the > button. AE lock is not possible.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button. AE lock is not possible.

159


Remote controlYou can use the Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.261) to start and stop the movie shooting. Set the release mode switch to <2>, then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take effect.

kHighlight tone priorityIf [Enable] is set, highlight detail will be improved. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother. The settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200-6400. The Auto Lighting Optimizer will also be set automatically to [Disable] and cannot be changed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother. The settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200-6400. The Auto

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200-6400. The Auto

www.devicemanuals.eu be set automatically to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu be set automatically to [

160

[o] tab

Sound recordingNormally, the built-in microphone will record monaural sound. Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external microphone equipped with a stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.18). When an external microphone is connected, sound recording will switch automatically to the external microphone.

[Sound rec.] options[Auto] : The sound recording level will be adjusted

automatically. Auto level control will operate automatically in response to the sound level.

[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound recording level to one of 64 levels. Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while pressing the key to adjust the sound recording level. While looking at the peak hold indicator (approx. 3 sec.), adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on the right for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0,” the sound will be distorted.

[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.

Level meter


Normally, the built-in microphone will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNormally, the built-in microphone will record monaural sound. Stereo sound

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurecord monaural sound. Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurecording is possible by connecting an external microphone equipped with a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexternal microphone equipped with a stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the camera’s external microphone IN

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.18). When an external

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

terminal (p.18). When an external microphone is connected, sound

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

microphone is connected, sound


recording will switch automatically to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

recording will switch automatically to the external microphone.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

external microphone.

] : The sound recording le

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] : The sound recording leautomatically. Auto level control will operate

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically. Auto level control will operate


automatically in response to the sound level.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically in response to the sound level.] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound

161


[Wind filter]When [Enable] is set, outdoor wind noise entering the microphone will be reduced. Note that some low-tone noise might also be reduced. When shooting in places where there is no wind, set this to [Disable] for a more natural sound recording.

Metering timerYou can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time).Grid displayWith [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally.Video snapshotFor video snapshots, you can set the shooting duration for a single video snapshot to approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. For details, see page 153.

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.The 48 kHz sampling frequency will be 16-bit recordings for both L and R.

The Metering timer and Grid display settings will also be reflected in Live View shooting.


You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

], you can display grid lines. It can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], you can display grid lines. It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

help you level the camera vertically or horizontally.

For video snapshots, you can set the shooting duration for a single

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For video snapshots, you can set the shooting duration for a single


video snapshot to approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. For details, see

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

video snapshot to approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. For details, see



162

[Z] tab

Exposure compensationAlthough exposure compensation can be set up to ±5 stops, exposure compensation for movies is restricted only up to ±3 stops. For still photos, exposure compensation may extend up to ±5 stops.Auto Lighting OptimizerThe Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set as explained on page 109. It will be applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie shooting.Under the [n] tab, if [kHighlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable] and cannot be changed.Custom White BalanceAs explained on page 117, the image for custom white balance can be selected.Picture StyleThe Picture Style can be set as explained on page 81. It will be applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie shooting.


For still photos, exposure compensation may extend up to ±5 stops.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor still photos, exposure compensation may extend up to ±5 stops.

The Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set as explained on page 109. It

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set as explained on page 109. It hooting and still photos taken during

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhooting and still photos taken during


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Highlight tone priority], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to ] and cannot be changed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] and cannot be changed.

As explained on page 117, the image for custom white balance can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

As explained on page 117, the image for custom white balance can

The Picture Style can be set as explained on page 81. It will be www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Picture Style can be set as explained on page 81. It will be applied to both movie shooting and www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

applied to both movie shooting and

163

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning IconsIf the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or a high ambient temperature, a white <s> icon will appear. Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed, the movie’s image quality will not be affected. However, if you shoot still photos, the image quality of the still photos may deteriorate. You should stop shooting still photos and allow the camera to cool down.If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white <s> icon is displayed, a red <E> icon may start blinking. This blinking icon is a warning that movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.Movie shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the <s> and <E> icons to appear sooner. When not shooting, turn off the camera.

Movie Shooting CautionsRecording and Image Quality

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer will thereby consume battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, you should set the IS switch to <2>.The camera’s built-in microphone will also record camera operation noise. Using a commercially-available external microphone can prevent (or reduce) these noises from being recorded.Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal.If movie shooting is not possible due to insufficient remaining capacity of the card, the movie recording size and movie shooting remaining time (p.146) will be displayed in red.



automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautomatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucamera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the

Movie shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovie shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause

> icons to appear sooner. When not shooting, turn off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icons to appear sooner. When not shooting, turn off


Movie Shooting Cautions

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recording and Image Quality


If the attached lens has an Image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the attached lens has an Image operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer will thereby consume battery power and may

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Image Stabilizer will thereby consume battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible


shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, you www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, you should set the IS switch to <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

should set the IS switch to <

164


If you use a card having a slow writing speed, a five-level indicator might appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.If you take still photos during movie shooting, the movie shooting might stop. Setting a low image-recording quality for still images might resolve this problem.

Playback and TV connectionIf the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part might look momentarily still when you playback the movie. In such cases, shoot movies with manual exposure.If you connect the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.218) and shoot a movie in [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the movie being shot will be displayed at a small size on the TV. However, the actual movie will be properly recorded at the movie recording size that was set.If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.218, 221) and shoot a movie, the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the sound will be properly recorded.

Indicator


If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunot appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.

see if the card can write fast enough.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusee if the card can write fast enough.If you take still photos during movie shooting, the movie shooting might

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you take still photos during movie shooting, the movie shooting might stop. Setting a low image-recording quality for still images might resolve

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustop. Setting a low image-recording quality for still images might resolve

If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part might look momentarily still when you playback the movie. In such cases,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

might look momentarily still when you playback the movie. In such cases, shoot movies with manual exposure.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shoot movies with manual exposure.If you connect the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.218) and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you connect the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.218) and 1920x1080

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1920x1080] or [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] or [be displayed at a small size on the TV. However, the actual movie will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

be displayed at a small size on the TV. However, the actual movie will be properly recorded at the movie recording size that was set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

properly recorded at the movie recording size that was set.If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.218, 221) and shoot a movie,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.218, 221) and shoot a movie, the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the sound will be properly recorded.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

sound will be properly recorded.

165

7Handy Features

Silencing the Beeper (p.166)Card Reminder (p.166)Setting the Image Review Time (p.166)Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.167)Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.167)Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.168)File Numbering Methods (p.170)Setting Copyright Information (p.172)Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.174)Checking Camera Settings (p.175)Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.176)Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On (p.179)Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.179)Setting the Flash (p.180)Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.184)Appending Dust Delete Data (p.185)Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.187)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devicemanuals.euHandy Features

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHandy Features

Setting the Image Review Time (p.166)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Image Review Time (p.166)Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.167)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.167)Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.167)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.167)Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.168)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.168)File Numbering Methods (p.170)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

File Numbering Methods (p.170)


Setting Copyright Information (p.172)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting Copyright Information (p.172)

166

You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or during self-timer operation.

Under the [1] tab, select [Beep], then press <0>. Select [Disable], then press <0>.

This prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.

Under the [1] tab, select [Release shutter without card], then press <0>. Select [Disable], then press <0>.If there is no card installed and you press the shutter button, “Card” will be displayed in the viewfinder, and you cannot release the shutter.

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after capture. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed immediately after image capture. If [Hold] is set, the image review will be displayed up until the [Auto power off] time.During image review, if you operate any camera controls such as pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.

Under the [1] tab, select [Image review], then press <0>. Select the desired setting, then press <0>.

Handy Features3 Silencing the Beeper

3 Card Reminder

3 Setting the Image Review Time

www.devicemanuals.euThis prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.

] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [shutter without card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushutter without card

>. Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>. Select [Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disable

If there is no card installed and you press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If there is no card installed and you press the shutter button, “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the shutter button, “displayed in the viewfinder, and you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed in the viewfinder, and you cannot release the shutter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cannot release the shutter.



You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after capture. If [www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

immediately after capture. If [www.devicemanuals.eu

Setting the Image Review Time

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Image Review Time

167

Handy Features

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after the set time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time. When the camera has turned off due to auto power off, you can wake it up by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the following buttons: <M>, , <x>, <A> etc.If [Off] has been set, either turn off the camera yourself or press the button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power.Even if [Off] has been set and the camera is not used for 30 min., the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD monitor again, press the button.

Under the [5] tab, select [Auto power off], then press <0>. Select the desired setting, then press <0>.

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read.

Under the [6] tab, select [LCD brightness], then press <0>. With the adjustment screen displayed, press the key to adjust the brightness, then press <0>.When checking the exposure of an image, set the LCD monitor brightness to 4 and prevent the ambient light from affecting the reviewed image.

3 Setting the Auto Power-off Time

3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness

www.devicemanuals.euEven if [Off] has been set and the camera is not used for 30 min.,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEven if [Off] has been set and the camera is not used for 30 min., the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD > button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUnder the [5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu5] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], then press <setting, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting, then press <

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Adjusting the LCD

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjusting the LCD


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Handy Features

168

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved.This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images.

Create a Folder

1 Select [Select folder].Under the [5] tab, select [Select folder], then press <0>.

2 Select [Create folder].Select [Create folder], then press <0>.

3 Create a new folder.Select [OK], then press <0>.A new folder with a higher one-up folder number is created.

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder


], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

Select [Create folder].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Create folder].Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Create folder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Create folder<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

3www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

3www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

169

Handy Features

Selecting a FolderWith the folder selection screen displayed, select a folder and press <0>.The folder where the captured images will be saved is selected.Subsequent captured images will be recorded into the selected folder.

Number of imagesin folder

Folder name

Lowest file number

Highest file number

About FoldersAs with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits (folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder with a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.171) is executed, a new folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.

Creating Folders with a Personal ComputerWith the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your images. The folder name must follow the “100ABC_D” format where the first three digits is 100 - 999 followed by five alphanumeric characters. The five characters can be a combination of upper- or lower-case letters from A to Z, numerals, and an underscore “_”. There can be no space in the folder name. Also, folder names cannot have the same three-digit number such as “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ” even if the letters are different.



” for example, the folder name starts with three digits

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

” for example, the folder name starts with three digits (folder number) followed by five alphanum

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(folder number) followed by five alphanumup to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

up to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder with a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also, if www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

folder with a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.171) is executed, a new folder will be created automatically.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

manual reset (p.171) is executed, a new folder will be created automatically.

Handy Features

170

The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file number is assigned.The file number will appear on your computer in this format: IMG_0001.JPG.

Under the [5] tab, select [File numbering], then press <0>. The available settings are described below. Select one, then press <0>.

[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even after you replace the card or create a folder.Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal computer.If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, you should use a newly-formatted card each time.

3 File Numbering Methods

XXX-0051

Card-1

XXX-0052

Card-2

File numbering after replacing the card

Next sequential file number

100

XXX-0051

101

XXX-0052

Card-1

File numbering after creating a folder


available settings are described below.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euavailable settings are described below. Select one, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect one, then press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even after you replace the card or create a folder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

after you replace the card or create a folder.Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering continues in sequence up

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

numbering continues in sequence up when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001


to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder. If you want to use continuwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

folder. If you want to use continu

171

Handy Features

[Auto reset]: The file numbering is reset to 0001 whenever you replace the card or create a folder.Whenever the card is replaced or a new folder created, the file numbering starts from 0001. This is convenient if you want to organize images according to cards or folders.If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001.This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example.After the manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset. (There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen.)

XXX-0051

Card-1

100-0001

Card-2

File numbering after replacing the card

File numbering is reset

100

XXX-0051

101

XXX-0001

Card-1

File numbering after creating a folder

If the file number in folder No. 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “. MOV” for movies.


File numbering after

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFile numbering after


[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.When you reset the file numbering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you reset the file numbering automatically and the file numbering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically and the file numbering starts from 0001.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

starts from 0001.This is convenient if you want to www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

This is convenient if you want to www.devicemanuals.eu










www.devic

eman

uals.

eu










100

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu100

creating a folder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucreating a folder

Handy Features

172

When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the image as Exif information.

1 Select [Copyright information].Under the [7] tab, select [Copyright information], then press <0>.

2 Select the option to be set.Select [Enter author’s name] or [Enter copyright details], then press <0>.The text entry screen will appear.Select [Display copyright info.] to check the copyright information currently set.Select [Delete copyright information] to delete the copyright information currently set.

3 Enter text.Refer to “Text Entry Procedure” on the next page and enter the copyright information.Enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

4 Exit the setting.After entering the text, press the <M> button to exit.

3 Setting Copyright InformationN

www.devicemanuals.euSelect the option to be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the option to be set.Enter author’s name

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEnter author’s name

Enter copyright details

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEnter copyright details

The text entry screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The text entry screen will appear.Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Display copyright info.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display copyright info.check the copyright information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

check the copyright information currently set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

currently set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

173

Handy Features

Text Entry ProcedureChanging the entry area:Press the <Q> button to toggle between the top and bottom entry areas.

Moving the cursor:Press the key to move the cursor.

Entering text:In the bottom area, press the <S> key or turn the <6> dial to select a character, then press <0> to enter it.

Deleting a character:Press the <L> button to delete one character.

Exiting:After entering the text, press the <M> button to finalize the text entry and return to the screen in step 2.

Canceling the text entry:To cancel the text entry, press the <C> button and the screen in step 2 will reappear.

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (provided software, p.302).

www.devicemanuals.eu> key or turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the <> to enter it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> to enter it.

> button to delete one character.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button to delete one character.

After entering the text, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After entering the text, press the <entry and return to the screen in step 2.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

entry and return to the screen in step 2.

Canceling the text entry:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Canceling the text entry:To cancel the text entry, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To cancel the text entry, press the <step 2 will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

step 2 will reappear.

Handy Features

174

Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD monitor and on the personal computer instead of horizontally. The setting of this feature can be changed.

Under the [5] tab, select [Auto rotate], then press <0>. The available settings are described below. Select one, then press <0>.

[OnPD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

[OnD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.

[Off] : The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

The vertical image is not rotated during the image review immediately after it is captured.Press the <x> button and the image playback will display the rotated image.[OnPD] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto rotate] was set to [Off]. If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the image might not be rotated automatically for playback. In such a case, see “Rotating the Image” on page 205.On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image captured when [OnD] had been set.Set [OnPD], then playback the image. It will be rotated.The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use the software provided with the camera instead.

3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images

FAQ

www.devic

eman

uals.

euare described below. Select one, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

euare described below. Select one, then

The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euon both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

: The vertical image is automat

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ically rotated only on the

: The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

The vertical image is not rotated during the image review

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The vertical image is not rotated during the image review immediately after it is captured.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

immediately after it is captured.


> button and the image playback will display the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button and the image playback will display the rotated image. www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

rotated image.] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.

175

Handy Features

While the shooting settings (p.47) are displayed, press the <C> button to display the camera’s major function settings.

C Checking Camera Settings

Date/Time (p.34)

WB correction (p.119)/WB bracketing (p.120)

Color space (p.121)

Auto rotate display (p.174)

Auto power off (p.167)

Card remaining capacity

Settings display

Red-eye reduction (p.91)

Beeper (p.166)

Sensor cleaning (p.184)

Live View shooting (p.123)


www.devic

eman

uals.

euWB correction (p.119)/

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWB correction (p.119)/WB bracketing (p.120)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

WB bracketing (p.120)

Color space (p.121)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euColor space (p.121)Card remaining capacity

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCard remaining capacity




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off (p.167)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off (p.167)

Beeper (p.166)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Beeper (p.166)

Handy Features

176

The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to the default. This option is available in Creative Zone modes.

1 Select [Clear settings].Under the [7] tab, select [Clear settings], then press <0>.

2 Select [Clear all camera settings].Select [Clear all camera settings], then press <0>.

3 Select [OK].Select [OK], then press <0>.Setting [Clear all camera settings] will reset the camera to the default settings on the next page.

Clearing all camera settings:After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] in [7 Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings (p.250).

3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN

FAQwww.devicemanuals.euSelect [Clear all camera settings].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Clear all camera settings].Clear all camera settings

www.devic

eman

uals.

euClear all camera settingsthen press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthen press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.

Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

177

Handy Features

Shooting Settings Image-recording SettingsAF mode One-Shot AF Quality 73

AF point selection Automatic selection Picture Style AutoDrive mode u (Single shooting) Auto Lighting

Optimizer StandardMetering mode q (Evaluative

metering) Peripheral illumination correction

Enable/Correction data retained

ISO speed AUTO (Auto)ISO Auto Max.: 3200Exposure compensation/AEB Canceled Color space sRGB

White balance Q (Auto)Built-in flash func. setting NormalFiring Custom white

balance Canceled

Flash exposure compensation 0 (Zero) WB correction Canceled

WB-BKT CanceledCustom Functions Unchanged File numbering Continuous

Auto cleaning EnableDust Delete Data Erased

Camera SettingsAuto power off 30 sec.Beep EnableRelease shutter without card Enable

Image review 2 sec.Histogram BrightnessImage jump w/6 e (10 images)Auto rotate OnzDLCD brightnessLCD off/on button Shutter buttonDate/Time UnchangedLanguage UnchangedVideo system UnchangedFeature guide EnableCopyright information UnchangedBass boost DisableControl over HDMI DisableEye-Fi transmission DisableMy Menu settings Unchanged



Custom white

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCustom white

www.devicemanuals.euWB correction

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWB correction


WB-BKT

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWB-BKT


File numbering

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFile numbering


Auto cleaning

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto cleaning


Dust Delete Data

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Dust Delete Data









Enable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enable





Enable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enable




2 sec.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 sec.




Brightnesswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Brightnesswww.devicemanuals.eu



6www.devic

eman

uals.

eu






Handy Features

178

Live View Shooting Settings Movie Shooting SettingsLive View shooting Enable Movie exposure AutoAF mode Live mode AF mode Live modeGrid display Off AF w/ shutter

button during k DisableAspect ratio 3:2Metering timer 16 sec. kShutter/AE lock

button AF/AE lock

Remote control DisablekHighlight tone priority

Disable

Movie recording size 1920x1080Sound recording AutoMetering timer 16 sec.Grid display OffVideo snapshot DisableExposure compensation Canceled

Auto Lighting Optimizer Standard

Custom white balance Canceled

Picture Style Auto



www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovie recording size


www.devicemanuals.euAuto

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto

www.devicemanuals.euSound recording

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSound recording



www.devicemanuals.euMetering timer

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMetering timer


Grid display

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGrid display


Video snapshot

www.devic

eman

uals.

euVideo snapshot


Exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation




Auto Lighting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto Lighting Optimizer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Optimizer








179

Handy Features

The shooting settings display (p.47) can be turned on or off by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Under the [6] tab, select [LCD off/on btn], then press <0>. The available settings are described below. Select one, then press <0>.

[Shutter btn.] : When you press the shutter button halfway, the display will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will turn on.

[Shutter/DISP]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the display will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will remain off. To turn on the display, press the button.

[Remains on] : Display remains on even when you press the shutter button halfway. To turn off display, press the button.

You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.Under the [5] tab, select [Screen color], then press <0>. Select the desired color, then press <0>.

When you exit the menu, the selected color will be displayed for the shooting settings screen.

3 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On

3 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color


display will turn off. And when you let go of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplay will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will turn on.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushutter button, the display will turn on.When you press the shutter button halfway, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen you press the shutter button halfway, the display will turn off. And when you let go of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplay will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will remain off. To turn on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shutter button, the display will remain off. To turn on the display, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the display, press the <Display remains on even when you press the shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display remains on even when you press the shutter button halfway. To turn off display, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button halfway. To turn off display, press the <button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button.

You can change the background color

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can change the background color


Changing the Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Changing the Shooting


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

180

The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the camera’s menu. You can use the camera’s menu to set the external Speedlite function settings only if the attached EX-series Speedlite is compatible with this function.The setting procedure is the same as setting a camera menu function.

Select [Flash control].Under the [1] tab, select [Flash control], then press <0>.The flash control screen will appear.

Normally, set this to [Enable].If [Disable] is set, neither the built-in flash nor the external Speedlite will fire. This is useful when you only want to use the flash’s AF-assist beam.

For normal flash exposures, set this to [Evaluative].[Average] is for advanced users. As with an external Speedlite, the metering area is averaged. Flash exposure compensation may be necessary.

3 Setting the FlashN

[Flash firing]

E-TTL II Metering Modes

Even if [Flash firing] has been set to [Disable], if focus is difficult to achieve in low light, the built-in flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam, p.86).


Normally, set this to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Normally, set this to [If [Disable] is set, neither the built-

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If [Disable] is set, neither the built-in flash nor the external Speedlite

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

in flash nor the external Speedlite will fire.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will fire. want to use the flash’s AF-assist

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

want to use the flash’s AF-assist


E-TTL II Metering Modeswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

E-TTL II Metering Modeswww.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

181


With [Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting], you can set the functions listed in the table below. The functions displayed under [External flash func. setting] will vary depending on the Speedlite model.

Select [Built-in flash func. setting] or [External flash func. setting].The flash functions will be displayed. The functions not dimmed can be selected and set.

[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting] Settable Functions

* For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Zoom], refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]

Function

[Built-in flash func. setting][External

flash func. setting]

PageNormalFiring

EasyWireless (p.191)

CustomWireless (p.194)

Flash mode k k 182Shutter sync. k k 182FEB* k

Wireless flash k k 189Channel k k k 191Flash group k 195Flash exposure compensation k k k k 104

Zoom* k


selected and set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euselected and set.

[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func.


Built-in flash func. setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Built-in flash func. setting


Firing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Firing


Easy

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EasyWireless

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Wireless(p.191)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.191)








k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k






Wireless flash www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Wireless flash www.devicemanuals.eu








182

Shutter sync.Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts.If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the exposure ends. When this is combined with a slow sync speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With 2nd-curtain sync, a preflash is fired when you press the shutter button completely. This is to determine the exposure. Then immediately before the exposure ends, the real flash is fired. Therefore, two flashes will be fired. However, with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 sec., 1st curtain sync will automatically take effect.If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also set [Hi-speed] (e). For details, see the Speedlite’s instruction manual.Wireless flashSee “Wireless Flash Photography” on page 189.Flash exposure compensationSee “y Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 104.Flash modeYou can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.

[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of EX-series Speedlites for automatic flash shooting.[Manual flash] is for advanced users who want to set the [Flash output] (1/1 to 1/128) themselves.Regarding other flash modes, refer to your Speedlite’s instruction manual.


sec., 1st curtain sync will automatically take effect.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusec., 1st curtain sync will automatically take effect.If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also set [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf an external Speedlite is attached, you can also set [Hi-speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHi-speed). For details, see the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu). For details, see the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

See “Wireless Flash Photography” on page 189.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

See “Wireless Flash Photography” on page 189.

Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 104.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 104.

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

183


Clear flash settingsWith the [Built-in flash func. setting] or [External flash func. setting] screen displayed, press the <C> button to display the screen to clear the flash settings. When you select [OK], the settings for the flash will be cleared.

The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting] will vary depending on the Speedlite model.

1 Display the Custom Function.With the camera ready to shoot with an external Speedlite, select [External flash C.Fn setting], then press <0>.

2 Set the Custom Function.Press the key to select the function number, then set the function. The procedure is the same as setting the camera’s Custom Functions (p.250).To clear all the Custom Function settings, select [Clear ext. flash C.Fn set.] in step 1.

Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions


Display the Custom Function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplay the Custom Function.

With the camera ready to shoot with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith the camera ready to shoot with an external Speedlite, select

www.devic

eman

uals.

euan external Speedlite, select External flash C.Fn setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euExternal flash C.Fn settingpress <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0


Set the Custom Function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the Custom Function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

184

Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this operation. However, you can execute the sensor cleaning at anytime as well as disable it.

1 Select [Sensor cleaning].Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor cleaning], then press <0>.

2 Select [Clean nowf].Select [Clean nowf], then press <0>.Select [OK] on the dialog screen, then press <0>.The screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned. Although there will be a shutter sound, a picture is not taken.

In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the power switch to <1> or <2>.

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Cleaning the Sensor Now

Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning

For best results, do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is placed on a table or other flat surface.Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve that much. Right after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf] option will remain disabled temporarily.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

Select [Clean now

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Clean nowSelect [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Clean now

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clean now<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


For best results, do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For best results, do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is

185

Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that might be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302) to erase the dust spots automatically.

Get a solid-white object (paper, etc.).Set the lens focal length to 50mm or longer.Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

1 Select [Dust Delete Data].Under the [y] tab, select [Dust Delete Data], then press <0>.

2 Select [OK].Select [OK] and press <0>. After the automatic self-cleaning of the sensor is performed, a message will appear. Although there will be a shutter sound, a picture is not taken.

3 Appending Dust Delete DataN

Preparation

Obtain the Dust Delete Data

www.devicemanuals.eu> and set the focus to infinity

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> and set the focus to infinity look at the front of the lens and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu look at the front of the lens and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euturn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

Select [Dust Delete Data].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Dust Delete Data].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Appending Dust Delete DataN

186

3 Photograph a solid-white object.At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft. - 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a patternless, solid-white object and take a picture.The picture will be taken in aperture-priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera.When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will appear. Select [OK], and the menu will reappear.If the data was not obtained successfully, a message to that effect will appear. Follow the “Preparation” procedure on the preceding page, then select [OK]. Take the picture again.

After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, you should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302) to erase dust spots, see the PDF Software Instruction Manual (p.305) in the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD-ROM).The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly affects the image file size.

About the Dust Delete Data

Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.


data can still be obtained even if there

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudata can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis no card in the camera.When the picture is taken, the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill start collecting the Dust Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euData. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will appear. Select

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

obtained, a message will appear. Select OK

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

OK], and the menu will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], and the menu will reappear.


If the data was not obtained

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the data was not obtained successfully, a message to that effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

successfully, a message to that effect will appear. Follow the “Preparation”

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will appear. Follow the “Preparation”



After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG www.devicemanuals.eu

About the Dustwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

About the Dust Delete Datawww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Delete Data

187

Dust which could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a blower, etc.The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended.Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.

1 Select [Sensor cleaning].Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor cleaning], then press <0>.

2 Select [Clean manually].Select [Clean manually], then press <0>.

3 Select [OK].Select [OK], then press <0>.In a moment, the reflex mirror will lockup and the shutter will open.

4 Clean the sensor.

5 End the cleaning.Set the power switch to <2>.

3 Manual Sensor CleaningN

For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) is recommended.If you use a battery, make sure it is fully recharged. If the battery grip with size-AA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.


Select [Clean manually].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Clean manually].

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Clean manually

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clean manually<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Manual Sensor CleaningN

188

While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and image sensor might get damaged.• Setting the power switch to <2>.• Opening the battery compartment cover.• Opening the card slot cover.The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care.Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor.Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or reflex mirror might get damaged.Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.


Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDo not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or

n the sensor. The blowing force can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eun the sensor. The blowing force can

damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudamage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the



sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

189

8Wireless Flash

PhotographyYou can use the built-in flash for wireless flash shooting.

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit with Canon Speedlites having a wireless slave feature and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.

Canceling the slave unit’s auto power offTo cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <A> button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test firing (PILOT) button to cancel the auto power off.

Be sure to also read the explanations about wireless flash photography in the Speedlite’s instruction manual.



Wireless Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless Flash

Photography

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPhotographyYou can use the built-in flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can use the built-in flash for wireless flash shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

for wireless flash shooting.

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit with Canon Speedlites having a wireless slave feature

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with Canon Speedlites having a wireless slave feature and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.www.devicemanuals.eu

190

Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and set it as follows. The settings other than the below for the slave unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Canon Speedlite slave units can be used and controlled together.(1) Set the Speedlite as a slave unit.(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same one as

the camera’s.*1(3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.196), set the slave unit ID.(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown

below.(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2

*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, the camera can work with any channel.

*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be received by the slave unit. With EX-series Speedlite having a fixed flash head and wireless sensor, make sure it fires, then take the picture.

Using Wireless FlashN

Slave Unit Settings and Position

Approx.

10m

(32.8ft.)

Approx.

7m

(23.0ft.)o

Approx.

80

Approx. 5m

(16.4ft.)

Approx. 7m

(23.0ft.)

Wireless flash set-up example

Indoors

Outdoors


, set the slave unit ID.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu, set the slave unit ID.

(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown

(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.




































www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


191

An easy, basic, and fully-automatic wireless flash shooting is explained below.

Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all wireless flash shooting. Therefore, these steps are omitted in the other wireless flash setups explained on the pages hereafter.

1 Press the button to raise the built-in flash.

For wireless flash shooting, be sure to raise the built-in flash.

2 Select [Flash control].Under the [1] tab, select [Flash control], then press <0>.

3 Select [Evaluative].For [E-TTL II meter.], select [Evaluative], then press <0>.

Easy Wireless Flash Shooting

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite


Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <built-in flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

built-in flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu






































www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

192


4 Select [Built-in flash func. setting].

Select [Built-in flash func. setting], then press <0>.

5 Select [EasyWireless].For [Built-in flash], select [EasyWireless], then press <0>.

6 Set [Channel].Set the channel (1-4) to the same one as the slave unit.

7 Take the picture.As with normal flash shooting, you can set the camera and take the picture in the same way.

8 Exit the wireless flash shooting.For [Built-in flash func. setting], select [NormalFiring].

Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.With [EasyWireless], even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire to control the slave unit. Depending on shooting conditions, the flash fired to control the slave unit may appear in the picture.Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.

www.devicemanuals.euSet the channel (1-4) to the same one

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the channel (1-4) to the same one as the slave unit.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euas the slave unit.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.As with normal flash shooting, you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

As with normal flash shooting, you can set the camera and take the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

can set the camera and take the picture in the same way.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

picture in the same way.

8www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

8www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

193


You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite. Convenient when you need a large flash output.

Basic settings:Flash mode : E-TTL IIE-TTL II meter. : EvaluativeBuilt-in flash : EasyWirelessChannel : (Same as slave units)

All the slave units will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure.No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or C), all the slave units will fire as one group.

If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash exposure compensation to adjust the slave units’ flash output.

Select [Flash exposure compensation], then press <0>.If the flash exposure is too dark, press the <Z> key to increase the flash exposure and make it brighter. If the flash exposure is too bright, press the <Y> key to decrease the flash exposure and make it darker.

Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites

Flash Exposure Compensationwww.devicemanuals.euAll the slave units will fire at the same

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll the slave units will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euoutput and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustandard exposure.No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or C), all the slave units will fire as one

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C), all the slave units will fire as one group.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

group.


Flash Exposure Compensationwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash Exposure Compensationwww.devicemanuals.eu

194

This describes fully-automatic wireless flash shooting with one external Speedlite and the built-in flash.You can change the flash ratio between the external Speedlite and built-in flash to adjust how the shadows look on the subject.On the menu screens, the <0> and <1> icons refer to the external Speedlite, and the <3> and <2> icons refer to the built-in flash.

1 Select [CustWireless].Follow step 5 on page 192 to select [CustWireless], then press <0>.

2 Select [Wireless func.].For [Wireless func.], select [0:3], then press <0>.

3 Set the desired flash ratio and take the picture.

Select [0:3] and set the flash ratio within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio to the right of 1:1 (up to 1:8) is not possible.If the built-in flash output is not enough, set a higher ISO speed (p.79).

Custom Wireless Flash Shooting

Fully-automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and Built-in Flash

The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop increments).

www.devicemanuals.euOn the menu screens, the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the menu screens, the <> icons refer to the external

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icons refer to the external Speedlite, and the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSpeedlite, and the <3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu3

icons refer to the built-in flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euicons refer to the built-in flash.

Select [CustWireless].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [CustWireless].Follow step 5 on page 192 to select

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Follow step 5 on page 192 to select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[CustWireless

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

CustWireless

2www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

2www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

195


Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group] setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple Speedlites.

Basic settings:Flash mode : E-TTL IIE-TTL II meter. : EvaluativeWireless func. : 0Channel : (Same as slave units)

[1All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unitConvenient when you need a large flash output. All the slave Speedlites will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure.No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or C), all the slave units will fire as one group.

Set [Firing group] to [1All], then take the picture.

Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites

www.devic

eman

uals.

euE-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

www.devic

eman

uals.

euE-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

Channel :

www.devic

eman

uals.

euChannel : (Same as slave units)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Same as slave units)

Speedlites as one flash unit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Speedlites as one flash unitConvenient when you need a large flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Convenient when you need a large flash output. All the slave Speedlites will fire at

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

output. All the slave Speedlites will fire at the same output and be controlled to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

obtain a standard exposure.

















196


[1 (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groupsDivide the slave units into groups A and B, and change the flash ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect.Refer to your Speedlite’s instruction manual to set one slave unit’s slave ID to A (Group A) and the other slave unit’s ID to B (Group B) and position them as shown in the illustration.

1 Select [Wireless func.].Follow step 2 on page 194 to select [0], then press <0>.

2 Set [Firing group] to [1 (A:B)].

3 Set the desired flash ratio and take the picture.

Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the flash ratio.

A B

If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.

The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2-stop increments).


Select [Wireless func.].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Wireless func.].

Follow step 2 on page 194 to select

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Follow step 2 on page 194 to select ], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], then press <

Set [Firing group] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set [Firing group] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

197


The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained on pages 195-196.The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group] setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.

1 Basic settings:Flash mode : E-TTL IIE-TTL II meter. : EvaluativeWireless func. : [0+3]Channel : (Same as slave units)

2 Select [Firing group].Select the firing group, then set the flash ratio, flash exposure compensation, and other necessary settings before shooting.

Fully-automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites

A B

[1All and 2] [1 (A:B) 2]


Flash mode : E-TTL II

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlash mode : E-TTL IIE-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

www.devic

eman

uals.

euE-TTL II meter. : EvaluativeWireless func. : [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless func. : [0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

Channel :

www.devic

eman

uals.

euChannel : (Same as slave units)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Same as slave units)

Select [Firing group].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Firing group].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the firing group, then set the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the firing group, then set the flash ratio, flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

flash ratio, flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


















198

When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below) which can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] and [Firing group] settings.

[Flash exp. comp]The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built-in flash and all external Speedlites.

[2 exp. comp.]The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built-in flash.

[1 exp. comp.]The flash exposure compensation is applied to all external Speedlites.

[A,B exp. comp.]The flash exposure compensation is applied to both groups A and B.

If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to perform FE lock.

Other Settings

Flash Exposure Compensation

FE Lockwww.devicemanuals.eu

external Speedlites.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexternal Speedlites. exp. comp.]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu exp. comp.]The flash exposure compensation is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe flash exposure compensation is applied to the built-in flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euapplied to the built-in flash. exp. comp.]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

exp. comp.]The flash exposure compensation is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The flash exposure compensation is applied to all external Speedlites.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

applied to all external Speedlites.[A,B exp. comp.]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[A,B exp. comp.]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The flash exposure compensation is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The flash exposure compensation is

] is set to [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set to [

199

Other Settings

When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], the flash output can be set manually. The flash output settings ([1 flash output], [Group A output], etc.) that can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] setting (see below).

[Wireless func.: 0][Firing group: 1All]: The manual flash output setting will be applied to all the external Speedlites.[Firing group: 1 (A:B)]: You can set the flash output separately for slave groups A and B.

[Wireless func.: 0+3][Firing group: 1All and 2]: The flash output can be set separately for the external Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.[Firing group: 1 (A:B) 2]: You can set the flash output separately for slave groups A and B. You can also set the flash output for the built-in flash.

Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash


all the external Speedlites.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euall the external Speedlites.

1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1 (A:B)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(A:B)the flash output separately for slave

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe flash output separately for slave groups A and B.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eugroups A and B.

[Wireless func.:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[Wireless func.:

Firing group:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Firing group:


flash output can be set separately for

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

flash output can be set separately for the external Speedlite(s) and built-in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the external Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

200

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

201

9Image Playback

This chapter explains features related to viewing photos and movies, going into more detail than in Chapter 2 “Basic Shooting and Image Playback.” Here you will find explanations about how to playback and erase photos and movies with the camera and viewing them on a TV set.

About images taken with another camera:The camera might not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name was changed.


www.devicemanuals.euImage Playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage Playback

This chapter explains features related to viewing photos

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter explains features related to viewing photos and movies, going into more detail than in Chapter 2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and movies, going into more detail than in Chapter 2 “Basic Shooting and Image Playback.” Here you will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

“Basic Shooting and Image Playback.” Here you will find explanations about how to playback and erase

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

find explanations about how to playback and erase photos and movies with the camera and viewing them

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

photos and movies with the camera and viewing them

202

Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine images on one screen.

1 Playback the image.When you press the <x> button, the last image captured will be displayed.

2 Switch to the index display.Press the button.The 4-image index display will appear. The currently-selected image will be highlighted in a blue frame.Press the button again to switch to the 9-image index display.Pressing the button will switch the display between 9 images, 4 images and one image displayed.

3 Select an image.Press the <S> key to move the blue frame to select an image.Turning the <6> dial will display the next screen or previous image.Press <0> and the selected image will be displayed as a single image.

x Searching for Images QuicklyH Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index display)

www.devicemanuals.euSwitch to the index display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSwitch to the index display.I

www.devic

eman

uals.

euI> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.The 4-image index display will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe 4-image index display will appear. The currently-selected image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

appear. The currently-selected image will be highlighted in a blue frame.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will be highlighted in a blue frame.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <switch to the 9-image index display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

switch to the 9-image index display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <the display between 9 images, 4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the display between 9 images, 4


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

203

x Searching for Images Quickly

With the single image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through the images forward or back according to the jump method that was set.

1 Select [Image jump w/6].Under the [4] tab, select [Image jump w/6], then press <0>.

2 Select the jump method.Press the <S> key to select the jump method, then press <0>.d: Display images one by onee: Jump 10 imagesf: Jump 100 imagesg: Display by dateh: Display by folderi: Display movies onlyj: Display stills onlyk: Display by image rating (p.206)

Turn the <6> dial to select the rating.

3 Browse by jumping.Press the <x> button to playback images.On the single-image display, turn the <6> dial.

I Jump through Images (Jump display)

Playback positionJump method

To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date].To search images according to folder, select [Folder].If the card contains both [Movies] and [Stills], select either one to display only movies or stills.If no images match the selected [Rating], browsing through the images with <6> is not possible.


Select the jump method.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the jump method.

S

www.devic

eman

uals.

euS> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the jump method, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eujump method, then press <Display images one by one

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplay images one by oneJump 10 images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euJump 10 images

f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

f:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Jump 100 images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Jump 100 imagesg

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

g:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Display by date

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display by dateh

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

h:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: i

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

i


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

204

You can magnify a shot image by 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.

1 Magnify the image.During image playback, press the button.The image will be magnified.If you hold down the button, the image will be magnified until it reaches the maximum magnification.Press the button to reduce the magnification. If you hold down the button, the magnification will be reduced to the single image display.

2 Scroll around the image.Use the <S> key to scroll around the magnified image.To exit the magnified display, press the <x> button and the single image display will return.

u/y Magnified View

Magnified area position

You can turn the <6> dial to view another image while the magnification is maintained.The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately after shooting.A movie cannot be magnified.


the magnification. If you hold down

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe magnification. If you hold down the button, the magnification will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe button, the magnification will be reduced to the single image display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eureduced to the single image display.

Scroll around the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Scroll around the image.Use the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use the <magnified image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

magnified image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

205

You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

1 Select [Rotate].Under the [3] tab, select [Rotate], then press <0>.

2 Select an image.Press the key to select the image to be rotated.You can also select an image on the index display (p.202).

3 Rotate the image.Each time you press <0>, the image will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° → 270° → 0°To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3.

To exit and return to the menu, press the <M> button.

b Rotating the Image

If you have set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.174) before taking vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image playback, set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnzD].A movie cannot be rotated.

www.devicemanuals.eu> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the

image to be rotated.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage to be rotated.You can also select an image on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can also select an image on the index display (p.202).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euindex display (p.202).

Rotate the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rotate the image.Each time you press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Each time you press <image will rotate clockwise as follows:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image will rotate clockwise as follows:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

206

You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks: l/m/n/o/p.

1 Select [Rating].Under the [4] tab, select [Rating], then press <0>.

2 Select an image or movie.Press the key to select an image or movie to be rated.You can display three images by pressing the button. To return to the single-image display, press the button.

3 Rate the image or movie.Press the <V> key to select a rating.The total number of images and movies rated will be counted for each rating.To rate another image or movie, repeat steps 2 and 3.


3 Setting Ratings


Select an image or movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect an image or movie.

> key to select an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select an image or movie to be rated.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage or movie to be rated.You can display three images by

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can display three images by pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupressing the <I

www.devic

eman

uals.

euI

return to the single-image display,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

return to the single-image display, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the <

Rate the image or movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rate the image or movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <rating.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

rating.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

207

3 Setting Ratings

The total number of a rating can be displayed up to 999. If there are 1,000 or more images for a rating, [###] will be displayed.

Taking advantage of ratingsWith [4 Image jump w/6], you can display only the rated images and movies.With [4 Slide show], you can playback only the rated images and movies.With Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302), you can select only the rated images and movies.With Windows Vista and Windows 7, you can see the rating with the file information display or the provided image viewer.



With Windows Vista and Windows 7, you can see the rating with the file

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith Windows Vista and Windows 7, you can see the rating with the file information display or the provided image viewer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euinformation display or the provided image viewer.

208

During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set any of the following: [ Protect images], [b Rotate], [9 Rating], [U Creative filters], [S Resize (JPEG images only)], and [e Image jump w/6].For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.

1 Press the <Q> button.During image playback, press the <Q> button.The functions settable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the screen.

2 Select a function and set it.Press the <V> key to select a function.The name and current setting of the selected function are displayed at the bottom.Set it by pressing the key.For Creative filters and Resize, press <0> and set the function. For details, see page 230 for Creative filters and page 233 for Resize. To cancel, press the <M> button.

3 Exit the setting.Press the <Q> button to turn off the Quick Control icons and function settings.

Q Quick Control During Playback

To rotate an image, set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnPD]. If [5 Auto rotate] is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate] setting will be recorded to the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.

www.devicemanuals.euSelect a function and set it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect a function and set it.V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV> key to select a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select a

The name and current setting of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The name and current setting of the selected function are displayed at the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

selected function are displayed at the bottom.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

bottom.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set it by pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set it by pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For Creative filters and Resize, press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For Creative filters and Resize, press

209

Q Quick Control During Playback

Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the single-image display and the Quick Control icons will appear. Pressing the <Q> button again will return to the index display.For images taken with another camera, selectable functions may be limited.

210

Basically, you can playback movies in the following three ways:

Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) to connect the camera to a TV set. Then you can playback the captured movies and still photos on the TV.If you have a High-Definition TV set and connect your camera with an HDMI cable, you can watch Full High-Definition (Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with higher image quality.

You can playback movies on the camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit out the movie’s first and last scenes, and playback the images and movies in the card in an automatic slide show.

k Enjoying Movies

Playback on a TV set (p.218, 221)

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.212-217)

Movies on a card can be played only by devices compatible with MOV files.Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB cable, movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved.

A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software) can be played on the camera.


connect your camera with an HDMI

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconnect your camera with an HDMI cable, you can watch

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucable, you can watch Full High-Definition

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFull High-Definition (Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDefinition (HD: 1280x720) movies with higher image quality.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhigher image quality.


Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitorwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitorwww.devicemanuals.eu

Movies on a card can be played only by devices compatible with MOV

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movies on a card can be played only by devices compatible with MOV

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB cable, movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cable, movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved.


211

k Enjoying Movies

(See the PDF file instruction manual for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser, p.305)

The movie files recorded in the card can be transferred to a personal computer and played or edited with ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software, p.302).You can also extract a single frame from a movie and save it as a still photo.

Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer

To have the movie playback smoothly on a personal computer, use a high-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardware requirements for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser, see the PDF file instruction manual.If you want to use commercially-available software to playback or edit the movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on commercially-available software, inquire the software maker.


a movie and save it as a still photo.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eua movie and save it as a still photo.


ly on a personal computer, use a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euly on a personal computer, use a

high-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardware

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhigh-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardware requirements for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser, see the PDF file

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

requirements for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser, see the PDF file

If you want to use commercially-available software to playback or edit the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you want to use commercially-available software to playback or edit the movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on commercially-available software, inquire the software maker.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

commercially-available software, inquire the software maker.

212

1 Playback the image.Press the <x> button to display images.

2 Select a movie.Press the key to select a movie.On the single-image display, the <1s> icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie. If the movie is a video snapshot, < s> will be displayed.You can press the <C> button to switch the shooting information display (p.227).On the index display, the perforation on the left edge of the image indicates a movie. As movies cannot be played on the index display, press <0> to switch to the single-image display.

3 On the single-image display, press <0>.

The movie playback panel will appear on the bottom.

4 Playback the movie.Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.The movie will start playing.You can pause the movie playback by pressing <0>.During movie playback, you can turn the <6> dial to adjust the built-in speaker’s sound volume.For more details on the playback procedure, see the next page.

k Playing Movies

Speaker


> icon displayed on the upper left

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon displayed on the upper left

indicates a movie. If the movie is a video

www.devic

eman

uals.

euindicates a movie. If the movie is a video s

www.devic

eman

uals.

eus> will be displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> will be displayed.You can press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can press the <switch the shooting information

www.devic

eman

uals.

euswitch the shooting information display (p.227).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

display (p.227).On the index display, the perforation on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

On the index display, the perforation on


the left edge of the image indicates a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the left edge of the image indicates a movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movie. the index display, press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the index display, press <

3www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

3

213

k Playing Movies

* When a background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be played.

This makes low-pitched bass tones easier to hear. This function takes effect only when playing back sound with the camera’s built-in speaker.

Set [4 Bass boost] to [Enable].

Function Playback Description2 Exit Returns to the single-image display.7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.

8 Slow motion Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the key. The slow-motion speed is indicated on the upper right.

5 First frame Displays the movie’s first frame.

3 Previous frame Each time you press <0>, a single previous frame is displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

6 Next frameEach time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.

4 Last frame Displays the movie’s last frame.X Edit Displays the editing screen (p.214).Background music*

Playback a movie with the selected background music (p.217).Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 VolumeYou can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.212) sound volume by turning the <6> dial.

3 Bass Boost

If the sound crackles, you should set [Bass boost] to [Disable].

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the continuous playback time will be approx. 2 hr. 30 min. at 23°C/73°F.If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, it will fast forward the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, it will fast forward the

www.devicemanuals.euDisplays the movie’s last frame.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplays the movie’s last frame.


Displays the editing screen (p.214).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplays the editing screen (p.214).


Playback a movie with the selected background music

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPlayback a movie with the selected background music


Playback position

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Playback position






Playback time (minutes:seconds)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Playback time (minutes:seconds)


You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.212) sound volume

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.212) sound volume by turning the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

by turning the <





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



This makes low-pitched bass tones easier to hear. This function takes www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This makes low-pitched bass tones easier to hear. This function takes effect only when playing back sound with the camera’s built-in speaker.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

effect only when playing back sound with the camera’s built-in speaker.www.devicemanuals.eu

Bass Boost

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bass Boost

214

You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1-sec. increments.

1 On the movie playback screen, select [X].

The editing screen will be displayed.

2 Specify the part to be edited out.Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or [V] (Cut end), then press <0>.Press the key to see the previous or next frames. Holding it down will fast forward the frames.After deciding which part to edit out, press <0>. The portion highlighted in blue on the top of the screen is what will remain.

3 Check the edited movie.Select [7] and press <0> to playback the portion highlighted in blue.To change the editing, go back to step 2.To cancel the editing, select [2] and press <0>.

4 Save the movie.Select [W], then press <0>.The save screen will appear.To save it as a new movie, select [New file]. To save it and overwrite the original movie file, select [Overwrite]. Then press <0>.

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

Since the editing is done in 1-sec. increments (position indicated by [X]), the exact position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from the position you specified.If the card does not have enough room, [New file] will not be selectable.More movie editing functions are available with ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software, p.302).


previous or next frames. Holding it

www.devic

eman

uals.

euprevious or next frames. Holding it down will fast forward the frames.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudown will fast forward the frames.After deciding which part to edit out,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAfter deciding which part to edit out, >. The portion highlighted

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>. The portion highlighted

in blue on the top of the screen is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euin blue on the top of the screen is what will remain.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

what will remain.

Check the edited movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check the edited movie.Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [the portion highlighted in blue.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the portion highlighted in blue.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

215

You can playback the images in the card as an automatic slide show.

1 Select [Slide show].Under the [4] tab, select [Slide show], then press <0>.

2 Select the images to be played.Press the <V> key to select the desired option, then press <0>.

[All images/Movies/Stills]Press the <V> key to select one of the following: [jAll images/kMovies/zStills]. Then press <0>.

[Date/Folder/Rating]Press the <V> key to select one of the following: [iDate/nFolder/Rating].When <xH> is highlighted, press the <C> button.Press the <V> key to select the desired option, then press <0>.

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Number of images to be played

Item Playback DescriptionjAll images All the still photos and movies in the card will be played back.

iDate Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will be played back.

nFolder Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played back.kMovies Only the movies in the card will be played back.zStills Only the still photos in the card will be played back.

9Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will be played back.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[All images/Movies/Stills]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[All images/Movies/Stills]

> key to select one of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select one of

the following: [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe following: [j

www.devic

eman

uals.

eujAll images/

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll images/Movies/

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovies/z

www.devic

eman

uals.

euzStills

www.devic

eman

uals.

euStills

[Date/Folder/Rating]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Date/Folder/Rating]Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <the following: [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the following: [Rating

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rating

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

216

3 Set [Set up] as desired.Press the <V> key to select [Set up], then press <0>.Set the [Display time] (still photos), [Repeat], [Transition effect], and [Background music].The background music selection procedure is explained on the next page.After selecting the settings, press the <M> button.

[Display time] [Repeat]

[Transition effect] [Background music]


After selecting the settings, press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAfter selecting the settings, press the

> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[Repeat

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRepeat


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Transition effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Transition effect]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

]

217


4 Start the slide show.Press the <V> key to select [Start], then press <0>.After [Loading image...] is displayed, the slide show will start.

5 Quit the slide show.To quit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the <M> button.

Set [Background music] to [On], then press <0>.Press the <V> key to select the desired background music then press <0>. You can also select multiple background musics.

To hear a sample of a background music, press the <C> button. Press the <V> key to listen to another background music. To stop listening to the background music, press the <C> button again. Adjust the sound volume by turning the <6> dial. After selecting the setting, press the <M> button.

Selecting the Background Music

To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show.During auto playback, you can press the <C> button to change the still photo display format (p.71).During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the <6> dial.During pause, you can press the key to view another image.During the slide show, auto power off will not take effect.The display time may vary depending on the image.To view the slide show on a TV set, see pages 218.Upon purchase, the camera is not set for selecting the background music. You must first use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy the background music to the card. For details, see the PDF EOS Utility Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.

www.devicemanuals.euBackground music

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBackground musicthen press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthen press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV

desired background music then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudesired background music then press 0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>. You can also select multiple

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>. You can also select multiple background musics.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

background musics.

To hear a sample of a background music, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To hear a sample of a background music, press the <> key to listen to another background music. To stop

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to listen to another background music. To stop listening to the background music, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

listening to the background music, press the <Adjust the sound volume by turning the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjust the sound volume by turning the <After selecting the setting, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After selecting the setting, press the <


To pause the slide show, press <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To pause the slide show, press <on the upper left of the image. Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on the upper left of the image. Press <

218

You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set.

HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.

1 Connect the HDMI cable to the camera.

With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo facing the front of the camera, insert it into the <D> terminal.

2 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV set.

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s HDMI IN port.

3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV’s video input to select the connected port.

4 Set the camera’s power switch to <1>.

Viewing the Images on TV

Viewing on HD (High-Definition) TV Sets

Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera.Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television, turn off the camera and TV set.Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed might be cut off.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the HDMI cable to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the HDMI cable to the

With the plug’s <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith the plug’s <facing the front of the camera, insert it

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

facing the front of the camera, insert it into the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

into the <D

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

D

2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

set.

219


5 Press the <x> button.The image will appear on the TV screen (Nothing will be displayed on the camera’s LCD monitor).The images will automatically be displayed at the TV’s optimum resolution.By pressing the <C> button, you can change the display format.To playback movies, see page 212.

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback operations.* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that

you can control them with one remote control unit.

1 Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].Under the [4] tab, select [Ctrl over HDMI], then press <0>.Select [Enable], then press <0>.

2 Connect the camera to a TV set.Use an HDMI cable to connect the camera to the TV.The TV’s input will switch automatically to the HDMI port connected to the camera.

Using HDMI CEC TV Sets

Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D> terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.Certain TVs might not be able to playback the captured images. In such a case, use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV.The camera’s < > terminal and <D> terminal cannot be used at the same time.

q


If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback operations.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback operations.* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDo not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <

Certain TVs might not be able to playback the captured images. In such

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCertain TVs might not be able to playback the captured images. In such a case, use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eua case, use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV.The camera’s < > terminal and <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe camera’s < > terminal and <D

www.devic

eman

uals.

euD


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

220

3 Press the camera’s <x> button.An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV’s remote control to playback images.

4 Select an image or movie.Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the / button to select an image.

5 Press the remote control’s Enter button.

The menu appears and you can do the playback operations shown on the left.Press the / button to select the desired option, then press the Enter button. For a slide show, press the remote control’s / button to select an option, then press the Enter button.If you select [Return] and press the Enter button, the menu will disappear and you can use the / button to select an image.

Still photo playback menu

Movie playback menu

Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For details, see the TV set’s instruction manual.Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not operate properly. In such a case, disconnect the HDMI cable, set [4 Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable], and use the camera to control the playback operation.

: Return: 9-image index: Play movie: Slide show: Disp. shooting info: Rotate


Press the remote control’s Enter

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the remote control’s Enter

The menu appears and you can do

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe menu appears and you can do the playback operations shown on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe playback operations shown on the

Press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

desired option, then press the Enter

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

desired option, then press the Enter button. For a slide show, press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button. For a slide show, press the remote control’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

remote control’s an option, then press the Enter

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

an option, then press the Enter

221


1 Connect the provided AV cable to the camera.

With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing the back of the camera, insert it into the < > terminal.

2 Connect the AV cable to the TV set.

Connect the AV cable to the TV’s video IN terminal and audio IN terminal.

3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV’s video input to select the connected port.


5 Press the <x> button.The image will appear on the TV screen (Nothing will be displayed on the camera’s LCD monitor).To playback movies, see page 212.

Viewing on Non-HD (High-Definition) TV Sets

q

(Red)

(White)

(Yellow)

Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided. Images might not be displayed if you use a different cable.If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not be displayed properly. Set the proper video system format with [6 Video system].

www.devicemanuals.euConnect the AV cable to the TV’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the AV cable to the TV’s video IN terminal and audio IN

www.devic

eman

uals.

euvideo IN terminal and audio IN

Turn on the TV and switch the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn on the TV and switch the TV’s video input to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

TV’s video input to select the connected port.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

connected port.

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4 Set the camera’s power switch to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the camera’s power switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<

5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

5

222

Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.

1 Select [Protect images].Under the [3] tab, select [Protect images], then press <0>.The protect setting screen will appear.

2 Select [Select images].Select [Select images], then press <0>.

3 Protect the image.Press the key to select the image to be protected, then press <0>.When an image is protected, the <K> icon will appear on the top of the screen.To cancel the image protection, press <0> again. The <K> icon will disappear.To protect another image, repeat step 3.

To exit the image protection, press the <M> button. The menu will reappear.

K Protecting Images

3 Protecting a Single Image

Image protect icon

www.devicemanuals.euSelect [Select images].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Select images].Select images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect images

Protect the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Protect the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <image to be protected, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image to be protected, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

223

K Protecting Images

You can protect all the images in a folder or card at one time.When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [3 Protect images], all the images in the folder or card will be protected.To cancel the image protection, select [Unprotect all images in folder] or [Unprotect all images on card].

3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card

If you format the card (p.45), the protected images will also be erased.

Movies can also be protected.Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.If you erase all the images (p.225), only the protected images will remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once.


224

You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.222) will not be erased.

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a 1+73 image will erase both the 1 and 73 images.

1 Playback the image to be erased.

2 Press the <L> button.The erase dialog will appear at the bottom of the screen.

3 Erase the images.Select [Erase], then press <0>. The image displayed will be erased.

By checkmarking the images to be erased, you can erase multiple images at one time.

1 Select [Erase images].Under the [3] tab, select [Erase images], then press <0>.

L Erasing Images

Erasing a Single Image

3 Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batchwww.devicemanuals.eu

Playback the image to be erased.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPlayback the image to be erased.

L

www.devic

eman

uals.

euL> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The erase dialog will appear at the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe erase dialog will appear at the bottom of the screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

bottom of the screen.

Erase the images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Erase the images.Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [image displayed will be erased.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image displayed will be erased.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




Checkmarking <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Checkmarking <

225

L Erasing Images

2 Select [Select and erase images].Select [Select and erase images], then press <0>.The images will be displayed.To display the three-image display, press the button. To return to the single-image display, press the button.

3 Select the images to be erased.Press the key to select the image to be erased, then press the <V> key.A <X> checkmark will be displayed on the upper left.To select other images to be erased, repeat step 3.

4 Erase the images.Press the <L> button.Select [OK], then press <0>.The selected images will be erased.

You can erase all the images in a folder or card at one time. When [3 Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or card will be erased.

3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card

To also erase protected images, format the card (p.45).


Select the images to be erased.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the images to be erased.

U

www.devic

eman

uals.

euU> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the image to be erased, then press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage to be erased, then press the > key.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key.

X

www.devic

eman

uals.

euX> checkmark will be displayed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> checkmark will be displayed

on the upper left.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on the upper left.To select other images to be erased,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To select other images to be erased, repeat step 3.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

repeat step 3.

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4 Erase the images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Erase the images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

226

* With 1+73 images, the 1 file size is displayed.* For still photos taken in movie shooting mode, <G> will be displayed.* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image, the <1+> icon will

change to .* Photos taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation are marked

with the < > icon. Photos taken with flash exposure compensation are marked with the <y> icon.

C Shooting Information DisplaySample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode

Flash exposurecompensation amount

Metering modeShooting mode


Shooting date and time


Histogram(Brightness/RGB)

Color spaceWhite balance

Picture Style/Settings

File size


Playback number/Total images recorded

Folder number - File numberRating

Aperture

Shutter speed

ProtectExposure compensation amount

ISO speed

Eye-Fi transmission


www.devic

eman

uals.

euHighlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHighlight tone priority


images, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images, the 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1

* For still photos taken in movie shooting mode, <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* For still photos taken in movie shooting mode, <* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image, the <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image, the <www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




File size

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

File size




www.devicemanuals.euISO speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

euISO speed

227

C Shooting Information Display

* For images taken in Basic Zone modes, the information displayed differ depending on the shooting mode.

* Photos taken in the <C> mode will show [Background blur].

* If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (when set manually) will be displayed.

* The < > icon will be displayed for a video snapshot.

Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode

Sample Movie Taken in Movie Mode

Ambience and ambience effects

Lighting or scene

Shooting mode

Movie shootingmode

Movie file sizeRecordingsystem

Shutter speed and aperture for movie shooting

Frame rateMovie recordingSize

Shooting time

Movie/Playback

www.devicemanuals.eu* For images taken in Basic Zone modes, the information displayed differ

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu* For images taken in Basic Zone modes, the information displayed differ

Background blur

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBackground blur



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

modeRecording www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Recording www.devicemanuals.eu

C Shooting Information Display

228

About the Highlight AlertWhen the shooting information is displayed, any overexposed areas of the image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again.About the HistogramThe brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [4 Histogram].

[Brightness] DisplayThis histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image. And the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be lost. And if there are too many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.

[RGB] DisplayThis histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. And the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be lacking. And if there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no detail. By checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition and white balance inclination.

Sample Histograms

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image



indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euindicates the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubrighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image. And the more pixels there are toward the right,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image. And the more pixels there are toward the right, there are too many pixels on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

there are too many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be lost. And if there are

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the left, the shadow detail will be lost. And if there are too many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

too many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be


lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its brightness histogram, you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

checking the image and its brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.www.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

euSample Histograms

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSample Histograms

229

10Post-Processing

ImagesAfter shooting, you can apply Creative filters or resize the images (downsize the pixel count).

It may not be possible to process images shot with a different camera.Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be done while the camera is connected to a personal computer via the <C> terminal.



Post-Processing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPost-Processing

Images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImages


Creative filters or resize

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative filters or resize the images (downsize the pixel count).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the images (downsize the pixel count).

230

You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.

1 Select [Creative filters].Under the [3] tab, select [Creative filters], then press <0>.The images will be displayed.

2 Select an image.Select the image you want to apply a filter to.By pressing the button, you can switch to the index display and select an image.

3 Select a filter.When you press <0>, the Creative filters will be displayed.For details on Creative filter characteristics, see page 232.Press the key to select a filter, then press <0>.The image applied with the respective filter will be displayed.

4 Adjust the filter effect.Press the key to adjust the filter effect, then press <0>.For the Miniature effect, press the <V> key and select the image area (within the white frame) where you want the image to look sharp. Then press <0>.

U Creative Filters

www.devicemanuals.euSelect the image you want to apply a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the image you want to apply a

By pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBy pressing the <can switch to the index display and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

can switch to the index display and select an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

select an image.

Select a filter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select a filter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you press <filters will be displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

filters will be displayed.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

231

U Creative Filters

5 Save the image.Select [OK] to save the image.Note the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].To apply a filter to another image, repeat steps 2 to 5.


With 1 or 1+73 images, the 1 image will be applied with the Creative filter and saved as a JPEG image. If an aspect ratio has been set for Live View shooting and a Creative filter is applied to the 1 image, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set.


232

U Creative Filters

Grainy B/WMakes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast, you can change the black-and-white effect.

Soft focusGives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the degree of softness.

Fish-eye effectGives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type distortion.Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. So in step 4, set the filter effect while checking the resulting image.

Toy camera effectGives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image’s fours corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the color cast.

Miniature effectCreates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks sharp. In step 4, you can press the <C> button to change the orientation (vertical/horizontal) of the white frame that shows where you want the image to look sharp.

Creative Filter Features


Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDepending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along , since this filter effect will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu, since this filter effect will

magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumagnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. So in step 4,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. So in step 4, set the filter effect while checking the resulting image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

set the filter effect while checking the resulting image.

Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image’s fours corners. By adjusting the co

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

fours corners. By adjusting the co


Miniature effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Miniature effectCreates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks sharp. In step 4, you can press the <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

sharp. In step 4, you can press the <orientation (vertical/horizontal) of the white frame that shows where www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

orientation (vertical/horizontal) of the white frame that shows where

233

You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.

1 Select [Resize].Under the [3] tab, select [Resize], then press <0>.The images will be displayed.

2 Select an image.Select the image you want to resize.By pressing the button, you can switch to the index display and select an image.

3 Select the desired image size.Press <0> to display the image sizes.Press the key to select the desired image size, then press <0>.

4 Save the image.Select [OK] to save the image.Note the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].To resize another image, repeat steps 2 to 4.


S Resize

Target sizeswww.devicemanuals.eu

Select an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect an image.

Select the image you want to resize.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the image you want to resize.By pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBy pressing the <can switch to the index display and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucan switch to the index display and select an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

select an image.

Select the desired image size.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the desired image size.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





Target sizeswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Target sizes

234

S Resize

Resize Options According to Original Image Size

Images such as the [8.0M 3456x2304] image size displayed in step 3 (p.233) have a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to aspect ratios is shown in the table below. The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the aspect ratio. The image will be slightly cropped.

Original Image SizeAvailable Resize Settings

4 a b c

3 k k k k

4 k k k

a k k

b k

c

About Image Sizes

QualityAspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

43456x2304




(5.3 megapixels)

a2592x1728




(3.0 megapixels)

b1920x1280




(1.6 megapixels)

c720x480

(350,000 pixels)640x480

(310,000 pixels)720x400*

(290,000 pixels)480x480

(230,000 pixels)

www.devicemanuals.eu] image size displayed in step 3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] image size displayed in step 3 (p.233) have a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to aspect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.233) have a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to aspect

ow. The asterisked image-recording

www.devic

eman

uals.

euow. The asterisked image-recording

the aspect ratio. The image will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the aspect ratio. The image will be


Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)4:3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4:3



3072x2304

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3072x2304(7.0 megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(4.0 megapixels)







1920x1280www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1920x1280(2.5 megapixels)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

(2.5 megapixels)www.devicemanuals.eu

235

11Printing Images

Printing (p.236)You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print out the images in the card. The camera is compatible with “wPictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.245)DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded in the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the print order to a photofinisher.


www.devicemanuals.euPrinting Images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPrinting Images

You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print out the images in the card. The camera is compatible with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

out the images in the card. The camera is compatible with PictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

PictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print


images recorded in the card according to your printing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images recorded in the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the

236

The direct printing procedure is done entirely with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor.


2 Set up the printer.For details, see the printer’s instruction manual.

3 Connecting the camera to the printer.

Use the interface cable provided with the camera.Connect the cable to the camera’s <C> terminal with the cable plug’s <D> icon facing the front of the camera.To connect to the printer, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

4 Turn on the printer.


Some printers may make a beeping sound.

Preparing to Print

Connecting the Camera to a Printer

www.devicemanuals.euSet up the printer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet up the printer.For details, see the printer’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor details, see the printer’s instruction manual.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euinstruction manual.

Connecting the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connecting the printer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

printer.Use the interface cable provided with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use the interface cable provided with the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connect the cable to the camera’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connect the cable to the camera’s

237

Preparing to Print

6 Playback the image.Press the <x> button.The image will appear, and the <w> icon will appear on the upper left to indicate that the camera is connected to a printer.

wPictBridge

Movies cannot be printed.The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct or Bubble Jet Direct.Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the printer. Resolve the problem displayed by the error message (p.244).

You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged. With a fully-charged battery, printing up to about 4 hours is possible.Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) to power the camera is recommended.



Movies cannot be printed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movies cannot be printed.The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct or Bubble Jet Direct.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

or Bubble Jet Direct.

238

The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the printer. Some settings might not be available. For details, see the printer’s instruction manual.

1 Select the image to be printed.Check that the <w> icon is displayed on the upper left of the LCD monitor.Press the key to select the image to be printed.

2 Press <0>.The print setting screen will appear.

3 Select [Paper settings].Select [Paper settings], then press <0>.The paper settings screen will appear.

wPrinting

Printer-connected icon

Print setting screen

* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file number imprinting and trimming might not be selectable.

Sets the printing effects (p.240).Sets the date or file number imprinting to on or off.

Sets the quantity to be printed.Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.243).Sets the paper size, type, and layout.Returns to the screen in step 1.Starts the printing.

The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.www.devicemanuals.euThe print setting screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe print setting screen will appear.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file

Sets the printing effects (p.240).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sets the printing effects (p.240).Sets the date or file number imprinting to on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sets the date or file number imprinting to on or off.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or off.

Sets the quantity to be printed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sets the quantity to be printed.Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.243).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.243).Sets the paper size, type, and layout.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sets the paper size, type, and layout.

The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.

239

wPrinting

Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer, then press <0>.The paper type screen will appear.

Select the type of the paper loaded in the printer, then press <0>.The page layout screen will appear.

Select the page layout, then press <0>.The print setting screen will reappear.

*1:From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.

*2:After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.245), you should print by following “Direct Printing with DPOF” (p.248).

Q Setting the Paper Size

Y Setting the Paper Type

U Setting the Page Layout

Bordered The print will have white borders along the edges.

Borderless The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless prints, the print will have borders.

BorderedcThe shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on 9x13cm and larger prints.

xx-up Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.

20-upc35-upp

Twenty or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper*2.• [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.

Default The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.

If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio, the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print. If the image is cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels.


The page layout screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe page layout screen will appear.

Select the page layout, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the page layout, then press 0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.The print setting screen will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The print setting screen will reappear.


The print will have white

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The print will have white


The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless prints, the print will have borders.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

borderless prints, the print will have borders.


The shooting information*

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The shooting information*9x13cm and larger prints.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

9x13cm and larger prints.


Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.www.devicemanuals.eu





Twenty or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paperwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Twenty or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paperwww.devicemanuals.eu

wPrinting

240

4 Set the printing effects.Set as necessary. If you need not set any printing effects, go to step 5.What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer.Select the option on the upper right (circled in the screenshot), then press <0>.Select the desired printing effect, then press <0>.If the <e> icon is displayed brightly next to <x>, you can also adjust the printing effect (p.242).

* When you change the printing effects, it is reflected in the image displayed on the upper left. Note that the printed image might look slightly different from the displayed image which is only an approximation. This also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 242.

Printing Effect Description

EOnThe image will be printed according to the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.

EOff No automatic correction will be applied.

EVIVID The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and greens.

ENR Image noise is reduced before printing.0 B/W Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.

zNatural Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic color adjustments are applied.

zNatural MThe printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting. However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with “Natural.”

EDefault The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details, see the printer’s instruction manual.

www.devicemanuals.eu> icon is displayed brightly

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon is displayed brightly x

www.devic

eman

uals.

eux>, you can also adjust

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, you can also adjust the printing effect (p.242).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe printing effect (p.242).


Description

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Description


The image will be printed according to the printer’s standard

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image will be printed according to the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

colors. The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic


No automatic correction will be applied.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

No automatic correction will be applied.


The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and greens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

more vivid blues and greens.


Image noise is reduced before printing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image noise is reduced before printing.







Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.www.devicemanuals.eu

Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.www.devicemanuals.eu

241

wPrinting

5 Set the date and file number imprinting.

Set as necessary.Select , then press <0>.Set as desired, then press <0>.

6 Set the number of copies.Set as necessary.Select <R>, then press <0>.Set the number of copies, then press <0>.

7 Start printing.Select [Print], then press <0>.

With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings. Just select the image and press the <l> button. With Easy printing, the number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of copies.) Also, any trimming (p.243) will not be applied.The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. See the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].If image tilt correction (p.243) has been applied, it may take longer to print the image.To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.176), all the settings will revert to the default.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, then press <

Set the number of copies, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the number of copies, then press

Start printing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euStart printing.

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Print

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Print

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings. Just select the image and press the <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Just select the image and press the <number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of

wPrinting

242

In step 4 on page 240, select the printing effect. When the <e> icon is displayed brightly next to <x>, you can press the <C> button to adjust the printing effect. What can be adjusted or what is displayed will depend on the selection made in step 4.

BrightnessThe image brightness can be adjusted.Adjust levelsWhen you select [Manual], you can change the histogram’s distribution and adjust the image’s brightness and contrast.With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press the <C> button to change the position of the <h>. Press the key to freely adjust the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).kBrightenerEffective in backlit conditions which can make the subject’s face look dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.Red-eye corr.Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On] is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.

e Adjustment of Printing Effects

The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not show on the screen.When you select [Detail set.], you can adjust the [Contrast], [Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color balance], use the <S> keys. B is for blue, A is amber, M is magenta, and G is green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected.If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to the default.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


], you can change

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], you can change

the histogram’s distribution and adjust the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the histogram’s distribution and adjust the

With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press > button to change the position of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button to change the position of > key to freely adjust

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to freely adjust the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level

Effective in backlit conditions which www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Effective in backlit conditions which Onw

ww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.

243

wPrinting

You can crop the image and print only the trimmed portion as if the image was recomposed. Do the trimming right before printing. If you set the trimming and then set the print settings, you may have to set the trimming again.

1 On the print setting screen, select [Trimming].2 Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

The image area within the trimming frame will be printed. The trimming frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].

Changing the trimming frame sizeWhen you press the or button, the size of the trimming frame will change. The smaller the trimming frame, the larger the image magnification will be for printing.

Moving the trimming framePress the <S> key to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally. Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area.

Rotating the framePressing the <C> button will toggle the trimming frame between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to create a vertical-oriented print from a horizontal image.

Image tilt correctionBy turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to ±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.

3 Press <0> to exit the trimming.The print setting screen will reappear.You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the print setting screen.

Trimming the ImageTilt correction



www.devicemanuals.eu On the print setting screen, select [Trimming].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu On the print setting screen, select [Trimming]. Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

The image area within the trimming frame will be printed. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe image area within the trimming frame will be printed. The trimming frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

trimming frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Changing the trimming frame size

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Changing the trimming frame sizeu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

u> or <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> or <I

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Itrimming frame will change. The sm

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

trimming frame will change. The smlarger the image magnification will be for printing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

larger the image magnification will be for printing.Moving the trimming frame

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Moving the trimming frameS

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

S> key to move the frame over the image vertically or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to move the frame over the image vertically or


horizontally. Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

horizontally. Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area.Rotating the framewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Rotating the framePressing the <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Pressing the <

wPrinting

244

Depending on the printer, the trimmed image area might not be printed as you specified.The smaller you make the trimming frame, the grainier the picture will look in the print.While trimming the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look at the image on a TV screen, the trimming frame might not be displayed accurately.

Handling Printer ErrorsIf you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, see the printer’s instruction manual.

Error MessagesIf a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

Paper ErrorCheck whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.

Ink ErrorCheck the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.

Hardware ErrorCheck for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.

File ErrorThe selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a different camera or images edited with a computer might not be printable.


resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euresume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, see the printer’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euresume printing. For details on resuming the printing, see the printer’s

If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the > to stop printing. After fixing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> to stop printing. After fixing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

to the printer’s instruction manual.


Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.

Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.


Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.

245

You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file No. imprinting. The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)

1 Select [Print order].Under the [3] tab, select [Print order], then press <0>.

2 Select [Set up].Select [Set up], then press <0>.

3 Set the option as desired.Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File No.].Select the option to be set, then press <0>. Select the desired setting, then press <0>.

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Setting the Printing Options

[Print type] [Date] [File No.]


Select [Set up].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Set up].

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Set up

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet up

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Set the option as desired.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the option as desired.

246

4 Exit the setting.Press the <7> button.The print order screen will reappear.

Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or [All image] to order the images to be printed.

Print type

K Standard Prints one image on one sheet.

L Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.

KL

Both Prints both the standard and index prints.

DateOn

[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.Off

File numberOn

[On] imprints the file No. on the print.Off

Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file No. might not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images from the card and try to print them.Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able to print the images as you specified. If this happens with your printer, refer to the printer’s instruction manual. Or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering prints.Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may not work or may be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the print order may not be possible.

RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW images through direct printing (p.236).With [Index] prints, both the [Date] and [File No.] cannot be set to [On] at the same time.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu7> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.The print order screen will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe print order screen will reappear.

Next, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Next, select [Sel.Image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sel.ImageAll image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All image] to order the images to be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] to order the images to be printed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

printed.


File No.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

File No.] are set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] are set to [be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order specifications have been set. It will not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

specifications have been set. It will not from the card and try to print them.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

from the card and try to print them.Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able

247


Sel.ImageSelect and order images one by one.To display the three-image display, press the button. To return to the single-image display, press the button.After completing the print order, press the <M> button to save the print order to the card.

[Standard] [Both]Press the <V> key to set the number of copies to be printed for the displayed image.

[Index]Press the <V> key to checkmark the box <X> and the image will be included in the index print.

BynSelect [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will all be canceled.

All imageIf you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images in the card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all the images in the card.

Print Ordering

QuantityTotal images selected

Index iconCheck mark

Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order even if you set “Byn” or “All image.”When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one print order. If you specify more than this, all the images might not be printed.


> button to save the print

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to save the print

[Standard] [Both]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[Standard] [Both]V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV> key to set the number of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to set the number of

copies to be printed for the displayed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucopies to be printed for the displayed image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image.

[Index]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Index]Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <


box <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

box <

Mark all in folder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mark all in foldercopy of all the images in the folwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

copy of all the images in the folall in folder www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

all in folder] and select the folder, the prinwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] and select the folder, the prin

Index icon

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Index icon

248

With a PictBridge printer, you can easily print images with DPOF.

1 Prepare to print.See page 236. Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to step 5.

2 Under the [3] tab, select [Print order].

3 Select [Print].[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a printer and printing is possible.

4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.238).Set the printing effects (p.240) if necessary.

5 Select [OK].

W Direct Printing with DPOF

Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.Certain printers cannot imprint the file No.If [Bordered] is set, certain printers might imprint the date on the border.Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a bright background or on the border.

Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop the printing and any of the following occurs:• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted

print-ordered images.• When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before

resuming the printing.• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.If a problem occurs during printing, see page 244.


e camera is connected to a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eue camera is connected to a

(p.238)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.238).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

.Set the printing effects (p.240) if necessary.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the printing effects (p.240) if necessary.


Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.Certain printers cannot imprint the file No.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Certain printers cannot imprint the file No.


Bordered www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bordered] is set, certain printers might imprint the date on the border.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, certain printers might imprint the date on the border.www.devicemanuals.eu

Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a

249

12Customizing the

CameraYou can customize various camera features to suit your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions. Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative Zone modes.

Cre

ative

Zone



Customizing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCustomizing the

Camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCameraYou can customize various came

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can customize various camera features to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ra features topicture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions. Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative

250

1 Select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)]. Under the [7] tab, select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)], then press <0>.

2 Select the Custom Function No.Press the key to select the Custom Function No., then press <0>.

3 Change the setting as desired.Press the <V> key to select the setting (number), then press <0>.Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to set other Custom Functions.At the bottom of the screen, the current Custom Function settings are indicated below the respective function numbers.

4 Exit the setting.Press the <M> button.The screen for step 1 will reappear.

Under [7 Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to clear all the Custom Function settings (p.176).

3 Setting Custom FunctionsN

Custom Function No.

Clearing All Custom Functions

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Change the setting as desired.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Change the setting as desired.Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <setting (number), then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting (number), then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to set other Custom Functions.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

set other Custom Functions.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

251

3 Setting Custom FunctionsN

Custom Functions

C.Fn I: Exposure A LV shooting

1 Exposure level increments

p.252

k

2 ISO expansion k

3 Flash sync. speed in Av mode k

C.Fn II: Image4 Long exposure noise reduction p.253 k

5 High ISO speed noise reductionp.254

k

6 Highlight tone priority k

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive7 AF-assist beam firing

p.255k (With f*)

8 Mirror lockup

* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with a LED light, the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the d and c modes.

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others9 Shutter/AE lock button

p.256k

10 Assign SET button k (Except 3)

11 LCD display when power ON p.257

The shaded Custom Functions do not take effect during Live View (LV) shooting. (Settings are disabled.)

www.devicemanuals.eup.253

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup.253



p.254

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup.254















* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sol

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (solthe LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the


C.Fn IV: Operation/Otherswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C.Fn IV: Operation/Otherswww.devicemanuals.eu



252

Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn IV: Operation/Others.

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn I: Exposure

C.Fn-1 Exposure level increments0: 1/3-stop1: 1/2-stop

Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. Effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop increments.

C.Fn-2 ISO expansion0: Off1: On

For the ISO speed, “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) will be selectable. Note that if [C.Fn-6: Highlight tone priority] has been set to [1: Enable], “H” cannot be set.

C.Fn-3 Flash sync. speed in Av (Aperture-priority AE) modeWhen you use flash in the aperture-priority AE mode (Av), you can set the flash sync speed.0: Auto

The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. With an external Speedlite, high-speed sync is also possible.

1: 1/200-1/60 sec. autoPrevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions. It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the background may come out dark.

With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor as shown below.


Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. Effective when

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucompensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. Effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop

www.devic

eman

uals.

euyou prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop


With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on




C.Fn-2 ISO expansion

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C.Fn-2 ISO expansion


For the ISO speed, “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For the ISO speed, “H

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) will be selectable.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

” (equivalent to ISO 12800) will be selectable. C.Fn-6: Highlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C.Fn-6: Highlight tone priority” cannot be set.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

” cannot be set.www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

253


2: 1/200 sec. (fixed)The flash-sync speed is fixed to 1/200 sec. This more effectively prevents subject blur and camera shake than with setting 1. However, the background may come out darker than with setting 1.

C.Fn II: Image

C.Fn-4 Long exposure noise reduction0: Off1: Auto

For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto] setting is effective in most cases.

2: OnNoise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The [On] setting may be effective for noise that cannot be detected or reduced with the [Auto] setting.

When 1 or 2 is set, high-speed sync cannot be used with an external Speedlite.

With settings 1 and 2, after the picture is taken, the noise reduction process may take the same amount of time as the exposure. You cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed.At ISO 1600 and higher, noise might be more pronounced with setting 2 than with setting 0 or 1.With setting 1 or 2, if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process. The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is completed. (You cannot take another picture.)


www.devicemanuals.euC.Fn-4 Long exposure noise reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

euC.Fn-4 Long exposure noise reduction


For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [setting is effective in most cases.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting is effective in most cases.

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The ] setting may be effective for noise that cannot be detected or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] setting may be effective for noise that cannot be detected or Auto

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto] setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] setting.


With settings 1 and 2, after the picture is taken, the noise reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With settings 1 and 2, after the picture is taken, the noise reduction process may take the same amount of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

process may take the same amount oftake another picture until the noise reduction process is completed.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed.At ISO 1600 and higher, noise might be more pronounced with setting 2 www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

At ISO 1600 and higher, noise might be more pronounced with setting 2

254

C.Fn-5 High ISO speed noise reductionReduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the noise level.0: Standard1: Low2: Strong3: Disable

C.Fn-6 Highlight tone priority0: Disable1: Enable

Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.

With setting 2, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly decrease.If you playback a 1 or 1+73 image with the camera or print an image directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302).

With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109) is automatically set to [Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.With setting 1, noise may become slightly more pronounced than with setting 0.

With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - 6400.Also, the <A> icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled.




C.Fn-6 Highlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C.Fn-6 Highlight tone priority


Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and highlights becomes smoother.


With setting 2, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith setting 2, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly

image with the camera or print an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu image with the camera or print an image directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced

www.devic

eman

uals.

euminimal. You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302).


With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109) is automatically set to www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109) is automatically set to ] and the setting cannot be changed.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

] and the setting cannot be changed.

255


C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive

C.Fn-7 AF-assist beam firingThe AF-assist beam can be emitted by the camera’s built-in flash or by an external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite.0: Enable

If necessary, the AF-assist beam will be emitted by the built-in flash or external Speedlite.

1: DisableThe AF-assist beam is not emitted.

2: Enable external flash onlyIf an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist beam.

3: IR AF assist beam onlyAmong external Speedlites, only those which have an infrared AF-assist beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Speedlite which uses a series of small flashes (like the built-in flash) from firing the AF-assist beam.With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with a LED light, the LED light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.

C.Fn-8 Mirror lockup

0: Disable1: Enable

Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex mirror action which can disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or close-up (macro) shooting. See page 122 for the mirror lockup procedure.

If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to [Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if the camera’s C.Fn-7 is set to 0, 2, or 3.


www.devicemanuals.euIf an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist beam.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunecessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist beam.

Among external Speedlites, only those which have an infrared AF-assist

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Among external Speedlites, only those which have an infrared AF-assist beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Speedlite which

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Speedlite which uses a series of small flashes (like the built-in flash) from firing the AF-

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

uses a series of small flashes (like the built-in flash) from firing the AF-

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with a LED light, the LED light will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with a LED light, the LED light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

not automatically turn on for AF-assist.


C.Fn-8 Mirror lockupwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C.Fn-8 Mirror lockupwww.devicemanuals.eu

If the external Speedlite’s [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF-assist beam firing], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if the camera’s C.Fn-7 is set to 0, 2, or 3.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera’s C.Fn-7 is set to 0, 2, or 3.

256

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others

C.Fn-9 Shutter/AE lock button0: AF/AE lock1: AE lock/AF

Convenient when you want to focus and meter separately. Press the <A> button to autofocus, and press the shutter button halfway to apply AE lock.

2: AF/AF lock, no AE lockIn the AI Servo AF mode, you can press the <A> button to stop the AF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

3: AE/AF, no AE lockThis is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly. In the AI Servo AF mode, you can press the <A> button to start or stop the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure will always be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment.

C.Fn-10 Assign SET buttonYou can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. Press <0> when the camera is ready to shoot.0: Normal (disabled)1: Image quality

Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen on the LCD monitor. Select the desired image-recording quality, then press <0>.

2: Flash exposure compensationWhen you press <0>, the flash exposure compensation setting screen will appear. Set the flash exposure compensation, then press <0>.

3: LCD monitor On/OffAssigns the same function as the button.

4: Menu displayPress <0> to display the menu screen.

5: ISO speedThe ISO speed setting screen will appear. Press the key or turn the <6> dial to change the ISO speed. You can also refer to the viewfinder to set the ISO speed.



operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by

www.devic

eman

uals.

euoperation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euany obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is

This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly. In the AI Servo AF mode, you can press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIn the AI Servo AF mode, you can press the <A

www.devic

eman

uals.

euA

the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure will always

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

picture is taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure will always be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment.


C.Fn-10 Assign SET button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C.Fn-10 Assign SET button


You can assign a frequently-used function to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can assign a frequently-used function to <camera is ready to shoot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera is ready to shoot.0: Normal (disabled)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0: Normal (disabled)


> to display the image-recording quality setting screen on the www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> to display the image-recording quality setting screen on the LCD monitor. Select the desired image-recording quality, then press <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

LCD monitor. Select the desired image-recording quality, then press <

257


C.Fn-11 LCD display when power ON0: Display on

When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settings will be displayed (p.47).

1: Previous display statusIf you pressed the button and turned off the camera while the LCD monitor was off, the shooting settings will not be displayed when you turn on the camera again. This helps to save battery power. The menu screens and image playback will still be displayed when used. If you pressed the button to display the shooting settings and then turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be displayed when you turn on the camera again.



then turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be displayed when

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthen turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be displayed when

258

Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.

1 Select [My Menu settings].Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu settings], then press <0>.

2 Select [Register to My Menu].Select [Register to My Menu], then press <0>.

3 Register the desired items.Select the item to be registered, then press <0>.On the confirmation dialog, select [OK] and press <0> to register the item.You can register up to six items.To return to the screen in step 2, press the <M> button.

SortYou can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select [Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <V> key to change the order, then press <0>.Delete item/items and Delete all itemsYou can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items] deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all items.Display from My MenuWhen [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you display the menu screen.

3 Registering My MenuN

About My Menu settings

www.devicemanuals.euRegister the desired items.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRegister the desired items.Select the item to be registered, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the item to be registered, then

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.

On the confirmation dialog, select

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

On the confirmation dialog, select OK

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

OK] and press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] and press <item.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

item.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can register up to six items.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can register up to six items.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To return to the screen in step 2,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To return to the screen in step 2,




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

259

13Reference

This chapter provides reference information for camera features, system accessories, etc.


www.devicemanuals.euReference

www.devic

eman

uals.

euReference

This chapter provides reference information for camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter provides reference information for camera


features, system accessories, etc.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

features, system accessories, etc.

260

With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately), you can connect the camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining battery level.

1 Connect the power cord.Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration.After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet.

2 Connect the DC Coupler.Connect the cord’s plug to the DC Coupler.

3 Insert the DC Coupler.Open the cover and insert the DC Coupler until it locks in place.

4 Push in the DC cord.Open the DC cord hole cover and install the cord as shown.Close the cover.

Using a Household Power Outlet

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera’s power switch is set to <1>.


Connect the DC Coupler.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the DC Coupler.

Connect the cord’s plug to the DC

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the cord’s plug to the DC

Insert the DC Coupler.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Insert the DC Coupler.Open the cover and insert the DC

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Open the cover and insert the DC Coupler until it locks in place.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Coupler until it locks in place.

4www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

261

This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to about 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or use a 2-sec. delay.

Set the self-timer to <Q> (p.89).Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control sensor and press the transmit button.The camera will autofocus.When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light and the picture will be taken.

Remote Control ShootingRemote Controller RC-6 (Sold separately)

Remote control sensor

Camera misoperation may occur near certain types of fluorescent lights. During wireless remote control shooting, try to keep the camera away from fluorescent light sources.

Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used.The Remote Controller can also be used for shooting movies (p.159). Remote Controller RC-5 cannot be used to take still photos in the movie shooting mode.
















Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control sensor and press the transmit button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sensor and press the transmit button.

When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light and the picture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light and the picture

Remote Control Shooting

262

Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx. 60 cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control terminal, Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to press the shutter button halfway and completely.

When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.25) attached to the camera strap.During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece cover is unnecessary.

1 Remove the eyecup.Push the bottom of the eyecup to remove.

2 Attach the eyepiece cover.Slide the eyepiece cover down into the eyepiece groove to attach it.After taking the picture, detach the eyepiece cover and attach the eyecup by sliding it down the eyepiece groove.

F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold separately)

Using the Eyepiece Cover


When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the image to look dark. To prevent th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.25)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

is, use the eyepiece cover (p.25) attached to the camera strap.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

attached to the camera strap.During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the



eyepiece cover is unnecessary.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

eyepiece cover is unnecessary.





















263

Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the built-in flash.For detailed instructions, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features of EX-series Speedlites.

External SpeedlitesEOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites

Shoe-mount Speedlites Macro Lites

With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings (p.181), only [1 exp. comp] and [E-TTL II meter.] can be set for [External flash func. setting]. (Certain EX-series Speedlites also enable [Shutter sync.] to be set.)If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD monitor will change from y to 0.If the Speedlite’s Custom Function has the flash metering mode set to TTL autoflash, the flash will fire at full output only.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

External Speedlites

264

With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only. Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or <f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before shooting.If you are using a Speedlite which has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.

Sync SpeedThe camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at 1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a sync speed slower than 1/200 sec.Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes properly with the camera.

Cautions for Live View shootingA non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.

Canon Speedlites other than the EX-series

Using Non-Canon Flash Units

If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and malfunction may result.Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It might not fire.


compact, non-Canon flash units at

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu compact, non-Canon flash units at

peeds. Use a sync speed slower than

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

peeds. Use a sync speed slower than

Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes

Cautions for Live View shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cautions for Live View shooting


A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.

265

With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN. The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or inquire the card’s manufacturer.

The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions (including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your area, please check with the card manufacturer.

1 Insert an Eye-Fi card. (p.29)

2 Select [Eye-Fi settings].Under the [5] tab, select [Eye-Fi settings], then press <0>.This menu is displayed only when an Eye-Fi card has been inserted into the camera.

3 Enable the Eye-Fi transmission.Press <0>, set [Eye-Fi trans.] to [Enable], then press <0>.If you set [Disable], automatic transmission will not occur even with the Eye-Fi card inserted (Transmission status icon I).

4 Display the connection information.

Select [Connection info.], then press <0>.

Using Eye-Fi Cards


Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAlso note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumany countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your area, please check with the card

www.devic

eman

uals.

euapproved for use in your area, please check with the card



Insert an Eye-Fi card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Insert an Eye-Fi card.

2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Select [Eye-Fi settings].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Eye-Fi settings].


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using Eye-Fi Cards

266

5 Check the [Access point SSID:].Check that an access point is displayed for [Access point SSID:].You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s MAC address and firmware version.Press the <M> button three times to exit the menu.

6 Take the picture.The picture is transferred and the <H> icon switches from gray (Not connected) to one of the icons below.For transferred images, O is displayed in the shooting information display (p.226).

H (Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.H (Blinking) Connecting : Connecting with access point.H (Displayed) Connected : Connection to access point

established.H ( ) Transferring : Image transfer to access point in

progress.

Transmission status icon


The picture is transferred and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe picture is transferred and the

> icon switches from gray (Not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon switches from gray (Not

connected) to one of the icons below.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconnected) to one of the icons below.For transferred images,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor transferred images, displayed in the shooting information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed in the shooting information display (p.226).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

display (p.226).

: No connection with access point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: No connection with access point.: Connecting with access point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Connecting with access point.Connected

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connected : Connection to access point

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Connection to access point established.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

established.Transferring

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Transferring

267

Using Eye-Fi Cards

Cautions for Using Eye-Fi CardsIf “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and personal computer settings. For details, see the card’s instruction manual.Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image transfer may take longer or it might be interrupted.Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.The battery power will be consumed faster.During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.



transfer may take longer or it might be interrupted.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutransfer may take longer or it might be interrupted.

, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.

During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDuring the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.

268

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable

*1 : The z icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode.*2 : For manual exposures only.*3 : If used during movie shooting, it will switch to <d>.*4 : If the AF mode is <f> during Live View shooting, the external Speedlite

will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary.

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes

k

o

D

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

o

k

k

o

D

k

k

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

o

k

k

o

D

k

k

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

o

k

k

o

D

k

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

o

k

k

o

D

k

k

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

k

k

o

D

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

k

k

o

D

k

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

o

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

o

D

k

k

o

o

k

o

o

o

o

*4

k

k

k

k*2

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

d c

f*3

f

k

A 2 3 4 5 6 7 C d s f a k z*18

k Mode Dial

Basic Zone Creative Zone

Long exposure noise reduction

Lens peripheral illumination correction

Correction / Bracketing

All recording quality settings selectable

Settable maximum ISO speed limit

ISO

Auto / ISO Auto

Manualspeed

Picture Automatic setting

Style Manual selection

Shoot by ambience selection

Shoot by lighting or scene type

Auto

White Preset

balance Custom


High ISO speed noise reduction


Color sRGB

space Adobe RGB

One-Shot AF

AI Servo AF

Focusing AI Focus AF

AF point selection

AF-assist beam

Manual (MF)








o www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

269

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes

*5 : Settable only for Live View shooting.*6 : Settable only for auto exposures.

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

o

k

k

k

k*6

k*6

o

o

k

k

A 2 3 4 5 67 C d sf a 8 k z*1

kMode Dial

Basic Zone Creative Zone

Custom Functionsetting

Metering modeselection

Exposurecompensation

Depth-of-fieldpreview

Flash exposurecompensation

Metering Evaluative

mode

Program shift

Exposure AEB

AE lock

Single shooting

Continuous shooting

Drive j (10 sec.)

l (2 sec.)

q (Continuous)

Fires automatically

Flash on

Built-in

Flash off

Red-eye reductionflash

FE lock

Wireless control

External Function setting

flash

Live View shooting

Aspect ratio*5

Quick Control

Feature guide









k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eukk

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk

k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k

Flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash exposure



compensation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation

Wireless controlwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Wireless control

270

1 Shooting 1 (Red) Page

2 Shooting 2 (Red)

3 Menu SettingsFor Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting

Quality 73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c / 1+73 / 1 76

Beep Enable / Disable 166Release shutter without card Enable / Disable 166

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 166Peripheral illumination correction Enable / Disable 110

Red-eye reduction Disable / Enable 91

Flash controlFlash firing / E-TTL II metering mode / Built-in flash function setting / External flash function setting / External flash C.Fn setting / Clear external flash C.Fn setting

180

Exposure compensation/AEB

1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB: ±2 stops) 105

Auto Lighting Optimizer Disable / Low / Standard / Strong 109

Metering modeq Evaluative metering / w Partial metering / r Spot metering / e Center-weighted average metering

102

Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 117

WB Shift/BKT WB correction: White balance correctionBKT setting: White balance bracketing

119120

Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 121

Picture StyleDAuto / PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1, 2, 3

81112115

The [2] Shooting 2, [y] Shooting 3, [7] Set-up 3, and [9] My Menu screens (tabs) are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.The [z] Shooting 4 tab is displayed in Basic Zone modes as the [2] Shooting 2 tab.Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.





Flash firing / E-TTL II metering mode /

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlash firing / E-TTL II metering mode / Built-in flash function setting / External flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBuilt-in flash function setting / External flash function setting / External flash C.Fn setting /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufunction setting / External flash C.Fn setting / Clear external flash C.Fn setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clear external flash C.Fn setting


1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB: ±2 stops)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(AEB: ±2 stops)


Disable / Low / Standard / Strong

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disable / Low / Standard / Strong








q

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

q Evaluative metering /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Evaluative metering / r

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

r Spot metering /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Spot metering / average metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

average metering



Custom White Balancewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom White Balancewww.devicemanuals.eu

Manual setting of white balancewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Manual setting of white balancewww.devicemanuals.eu





271

3 Menu Settings

y Shooting 3 (Red) Page

z Shooting 4 (Red)

3 Playback 1 (Blue)

4 Playback 2 (Blue)

Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 185

ISO Auto Max.: 400 / Max.: 800 / Max.: 1600 / Max.: 3200 / Max.: 6400 80

Live View shooting Enable / Disable 125AF mode Live mode / u Live mode / Quick mode 131Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m 129Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 129

Metering timer 4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min. 130

Protect imagesSelect images / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in folder / All images on card / Unprotect all images on card

222

Rotate Rotate vertical images 205

Erase images Select and erase images / All images in folder / All images on card 224

Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 245

Creative filters Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect / Toy camera effect / Miniature effect 230

Resize Downsize the image’s pixel count 233

Histogram Brightness / RGB 228

Image jump w/61 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date / Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating 203

Slide show Playback description / Display time / Repeat / Transition effect / Background music 215

Rating [OFF] / l / m / n / o / p 206Bass boost Disable / Enable 213Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 219



4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /



Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in folder / All images on card /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

all images in folder / All images on card / Unprotect all images on card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Unprotect all images on card


Rotate vertical images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rotate vertical images






Select and erase images / All images in folder /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select and erase images / All images in folder / All images on card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All images on card


Specify images to be printed (DPOF)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Specify images to be printed (DPOF)





Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /









3 Menu Settings

272

5 Set-up 1 (Yellow) Page

* Displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is used.

6 Set-up 2 (Yellow)

7 Set-up 3 (Yellow)

9 My Menu (Green)

Auto power off 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / Off 167

Auto rotate OnPD / OnD / Off 174Format Initialize and erase data on the card 45File numbering Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 170Select folder Create and select a folder 168Screen color Select the shooting settings screen color 179

Eye-Fi settings* Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / EnableConnection information 265

LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 167LCD off/on button Shutter button / Shutter/DISP / Remains on 179

Date/Time Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour, min., sec.) 34

LanguageK Select the interface language 35Video system NTSC / PAL 221

Sensor cleaningAuto cleaning: Enable / Disable

184Clean nowClean manually 187

Feature guide Enable / Disable 48

Custom Functions (C.Fn) Customize camera functions as desired 250

Copyright informationDisplay copyright information / Enter author’s name / Enter copyright details / Delete copyright information

172

Clear settings Clear all camera settings / Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) 176

Firmware Ver. For updating the firmware -

My Menu settings Register frequently-used menu items and Custom Functions 258




Seven brightness levels provided

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSeven brightness levels provided


Shutter button / Shutter/DISP / Remains on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter button / Shutter/DISP / Remains on





Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour,


Select the interface language

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the interface language


NTSC / PAL

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

NTSC / PAL


Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable


Clean now

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clean now



Clean manually

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clean manually




Enable / Disablewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enable / Disablewww.devicemanuals.eu


(Yellow)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

(Yellow)www.devicemanuals.eu








273

3 Menu Settings

n Movie 1 (Red) Page

o Movie 2 (Red)

k For Movie Shooting

Movie exposure Auto / Manual 157AF mode Live mode / u Live mode / Quick mode 157

AF with shutter button during k

Disable / Enable 157

kShutter/AE lock button

AF/AE lock / AE lock/AF /AF/AF lock, no AE lock / AE/AF, no AE lock

158

Remote control Disable / Enable 159kHighlight tone priority Disable / Enable 159


Movie recording size:1920x1080 (6 / 5 / 4) /1280x720 (8 / 7) /640x480 (6 / 5)

150

Digital zoom: OFF / 3x - 10x 152

Sound recordingSound recording: Auto / Manual / DisableRecording levelWind filter: Disable / Enable

160

Metering timer 4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min. 161

Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m 161

Video snapshot Disable / 2 sec. movie / 4 sec. movie / 8 sec. movie 153






Movie recording size:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie recording size:1920x1080 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1920x1080 (6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6 /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

/ 5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

51280x720 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1280x720 (8

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

8 /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

/ 640x480 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

640x480 (6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6 /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

/


Digital zoom: OFF / 3x - 10x

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Digital zoom: OFF / 3x - 10x


Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sound recording: Auto / Manual / DisableRecording level

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recording levelWind filter: Disable / Enable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Wind filter: Disable / Enable

Metering timer www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Metering timer www.devicemanuals.eu










3 Menu Settings

274

Z Movie 3 (Red) Page

1 Shooting 1 (Red)

3 Playback 1 (Blue)

Exposure compensation 1/3-stop increments, ±5 stops 162

Auto Lighting Optimizer Disable / Low / Standard / Strong 162

Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 162

Picture StyleDAuto / PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1, 2, 3

162

Quality 73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c / 1+73 / 1 76

Beep Enable / Disable 166Release shutter without card Enable / Disable 166

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 166Peripheral illumination correction Enable / Disable 110

Protect imagesSelect images / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in folder / All images on card / Unprotect all images on card

222

Rotate Rotate vertical images 205

Erase images Select and erase images / All images in folder / All images on card 224

Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 245

Creative filters Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect / Toy camera effect / Miniature effect 230

Resize Downsize the image’s pixel count 233



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu8a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eua /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu / b

www.devic

eman

uals.

eub




Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold


Enable / Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enable / Disable



Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in folder / All images on card /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

all images in folder / All images on card / Unprotect all images on card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Unprotect all images on card












275

3 Menu Settings

4 Playback 2 (Blue) Page

5 Set-up 1 (Yellow)


6 Set-up 2 (Yellow)

Histogram Brightness / RGB 228

Image jump w/61 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date / Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating 203

Slide show Playback description / Display time / Repeat / Transition effect / Background music 215

Rating [OFF] / l / m / n / o / p 206Bass boost Disable / Enable 213Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 219

Auto power off 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / Off 167

Auto rotate OnPD / OnD / Off 174Format Initialize and erase data on the card 45File numbering Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 170Select folder Create and select a folder 168

Eye-Fi settings* Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / EnableConnection information 265

LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 167

Date/Time Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour, min., sec.) 34

LanguageK Select the interface language 35Video system NTSC / PAL 221Feature guide Enable / Disable 48

The menu tabs and options displayed will differ for viewfinder shooting, Live View shooting, and movie shooting.The [n] Movie 1, [o] Movie 2, and [Z] Movie 3 screens (tabs) are displayed only in the movie shooting mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devicemanuals.eu30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /


/ Off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu / Off


Initialize and erase data on the card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Initialize and erase data on the card


Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset


Create and select a folder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Create and select a folder


Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / EnableConnection information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connection information



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


(Yellow)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Yellow)









LCD brightness

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

LCD brightness




276

System Map

Eyecup Ef Rubber Frame Ef

Eyepiece Extender EP-EX15ll

Angle Finder C

E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses

Wide Strap EW-100DB lll

270EX II ST-E2 430EX II 320EX 580EX II Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX

Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX

Semi Hard Case EH19-L

Hand Strap E2

Battery Pack LP-E8

Battery Grip BG-E8

Battery Charger LC-E8 or LC-E8E

Compact Power Adapter

CA-PS700Battery Magazine BGM-E8A for

size-AA/LR6 batteries

Battery Magazine BGM-E8L for two

LP-E8 battery packs

DC Coupler DR-E8

Bundled Accessories

AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8






























277

System Map

EF-S lenses EF lenses

Remote Switch RS-60E3

Remote Controller

RC-6

External microphone

HDMI Cable HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

TV/Video

PictBridge-compatible printer

Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

EOS Solution Disk


Disk

Interface Cable (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U (1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)

Card reader SD/SDHC/SDXC

memory card

Card slot

USB port

Windows 7

Windows Vista

Windows XP

Mac OS X

Computer

* The length of all cables is approx. **m/**ft.









































HDMI Cable

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHDMI Cable

HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

EOS Software

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Instruction Manuals


Disk

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disk

Interface Cable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Interface Cable




(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

278

If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E8.

If there is a problem with the battery charger, the protective circuit will stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If this happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from the power outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a power outlet again.

The battery is not properly installed in the camera (p.28).Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.28).Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.29).Recharge the battery (p.26).Press the button (p.47).

If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the access lamp will still continue to light/blink for a few seconds. When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.

Troubleshooting Guide

Power-Related Problems

The battery pack does not recharge.

The battery charger’s lamp blinks.

The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <1>.

The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <2>.

www.devicemanuals.euIf there is a problem with the battery charger, the protective circuit will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf there is a problem with the battery charger, the protective circuit will stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If this happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from the power

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthis happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from the power outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a



The battery is not properly installed in the camera (p.28).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The battery is not properly installed in the camera (p.28).Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.28).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.28).Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.29).www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.29).Recharge the battery (p.26).www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Recharge the battery (p.26).www.devicemanuals.eu

The camera does not operate even when the power switch is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The camera does not operate even when the power switch is

279


Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.26).The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over repeated use. Purchase a new one.If you use Live View shooting or shoot movies for a prolonged period (p.123, 141), the number of possible shots will decrease.If you hold down the shutter button for a long time or often use only the AF without taking pictures, the number of possible shots will decrease.If you often use the LCD monitor, the number of possible shots will decrease.If you use the lens Image Stabilizer, the number of possible shots will decrease.

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take effect, set [5 Auto power off] to [Off] (p.167).Even if [5 Auto power off] has been set to [Off], the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is idle for 30 min. Press the button to turn on the LCD monitor.

The card is not properly inserted (p.29).If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make room (p.29, 224).If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode while the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to focus, or focus manually (p.40, 87).Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (p.29).

The battery becomes exhausted quickly.

The camera turns off by itself.

Shooting-Related Problems

No images can be shot nor recorded.www.devicemanuals.eu

If you often use the LCD monitor, the number of possible shots will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you often use the LCD monitor, the number of possible shots will

If you use the lens Image Stabilizer, the number of possible shots will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you use the lens Image Stabilizer, the number of possible shots will

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take Auto power off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] to [Auto power off] to [Auto power off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off] to [Auto power offAuto power off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off] has been set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] has been set to [Auto power off] has been set to [Auto power off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off] has been set to [Auto power off


still turn off after the camera is idle for 30 min. Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

still turn off after the camera is idle for 30 min. Press the <button to turn on the LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button to turn on the LCD monitor.


Shooting-Related Problemswww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Shooting-Related Problemswww.devicemanuals.eu

280

If a card error message is displayed, see page 30 or 287.

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number might not start from 0001 (p.170).

Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.36).To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.39, 40).If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter speed (p.94), set a higher ISO speed (p.79), use flash (p.90), or use a tripod.

Horizontal stripes or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other artificial lighting during viewfinder or Live View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone might not come out right. A slow shutter speed may solve the problem.

The card cannot be used.

The file numbering does not start from 0001.

The image is out of focus.

Horizontal stripes appear, or the exposure or color tone look strange.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.39, 40).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.39, 40).If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIn low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter speed (p.94), set a higher ISO speed (p.79), use flash (p.90), or use a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

speed (p.94), set a higher ISO speed (p.79), use flash (p.90), or use a


Horizontal stripes or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Horizontal stripes or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other artificial lighting during viewfinder or Live

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

light, LED bulbs, or other artificial lighting during viewfinder or Live View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone might not come out

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone might not come out right. A slow shutter speed may solve the problem.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

right. A slow shutter speed may solve the problem.www.devicemanuals.eu

Horizontal stripes appear, or th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Horizontal stripes appear, or the exposure or color tone look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

e exposure or color tone look

281


Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], set [5: High ISO speed noise reduction] to [Standard], [Low], or [Disable]. If it is set to [Strong], the maximum burst during continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.254).If you shoot something that has fine detail (field of grass, etc.), the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst might be lower than the number mentioned on page 76.

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is set, ISO 100 can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.159).

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.162).

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], the [H] ISO speed cannot be selected even when [2: ISO expansion] has been set to [1: On]. If [0: Disable] is set, [H] can be set (p.252).

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

ISO 100 cannot be set.

The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.

ISO speed [H] (ISO 12800) cannot be set.

www.devicemanuals.eu], if [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], if [6: Highlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6: Highlight tone priority], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [

100 can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.159).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu100 can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.159).


Custom Functions (C.Fn)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom Functions (C.Fn)], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.254). This

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.162).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

also applies to movie shooting (p.162).



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



7 www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom Functions (C.Fn)www.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


282

If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the subject and background are properly exposed. If you do not want a slow shutter speed to be set, set [3: Flash sync. speed in Av mode] in [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)] to 1 or 2 (p.252).

In the A, 2, 4, and 6 modes, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically when flash is necessary.

If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the flash might stop operating to protect the flash unit.

If flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite, [Flash exp. comp] (p.182) cannot be set in the [External flash func. setting] screen. Also, if you set flash exposure compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure compensation with the external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation setting will override the camera’s. When the Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.

Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], set [3: Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [0: Auto] (p.252).

The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal.

When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed becomes slow.

The built-in flash pops up by itself.

The built-in flash does not fire.

I cannot set flash exposure compensation with [External flash func. setting].

High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.

The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.

www.devicemanuals.eu modes, the built-in flash will pop-up

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu modes, the built-in flash will pop-up

If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the flash might stop operating to protect the flash unit.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

flash might stop operating to protect the flash unit.


If flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite, Flash exp. comp

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash exp. comp] (p.182) cannot be set in the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] (p.182) cannot be set in the [] screen. Also, if you set flash exposure compensation with the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

] screen. Also, if you set flash exposure compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure compensation with the external www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

camera and then set flash exposure compensation with the external www.devicemanuals.eu

I cannot set flash exposure compensation with [External

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

I cannot set flash exposure compensation with [External

283


If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot (p.125).

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white <s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality might deteriorate. If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically (p.139, 163).

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “ ” or faster card. To find out the card’s read/write speed, see the card manufacturer’s Web site, etc.The movie shooting will be terminated automatically if the file size reaches 4 GB or if the movie length reaches 29 min. 59 sec.

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other artificial lighting during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color tone might also be recorded. With manual exposures, a slow shutter speed may solve the problem.

The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting.

During Live View and movie shooting, a white <s> or red <E> icon is displayed.

Movie shooting terminates by itself.

The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting.


> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality might

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality might

> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically (p.139,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euView or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically (p.139,


If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “ ” or faster card. To

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “ ” or faster card. To find out the card’s read/write speed, see the card manufacturer’s Web

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

find out the card’s read/write speed, see the card manufacturer’s Web

The movie shooting will be terminated automatically if the file size

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The movie shooting will be terminated automatically if the file size reaches 4 GB or if the movie length reaches 29 min. 59 sec.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

reaches 4 GB or if the movie length reaches 29 min. 59 sec.


inates by itself.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

inates by itself.


The image flickers or horizontalwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image flickers or horizontal


284

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow or might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

It is the highlight alert (p.228). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss of highlight detail will blink.

If the image has been protected, it cannot be erased (p.222).

Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (p.302) or other software cannot be played with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser can be played on the camera.

If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the operation noise will also be recorded. Use an external microphone (commercially available) (p.160).

During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes. If this happens, use manual exposure (p.144).

Playback Problems

The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.

Part of the image blinks in black.

The image cannot be erased.

The movie cannot play.

When the movie is played, camera operation noise can be heard.

The movie has still moments.


It is the highlight alert (p.228). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIt is the highlight alert (p.228). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (p.302) or other software cannot be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (p.302) or other software cannot be played with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

played with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser can be played on the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser can be played on the camera.


When the movie is played, camewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the movie is played, came

285


If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning) or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.

Make sure the AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.218, 221).Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as the TV set (p.221).

Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards might not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera to the computer with the provided interface cable, then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided software, p.302).

In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative Zone mode (p.43).

Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character will be an underscore (p.121).

The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.

No image appears on the TV screen.

My card reader does not recognize the card.

Display Problems

The menu screen shows few tabs and options.

The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_MG_”).


Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDepending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards might not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

might not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera to the computer with the provided interface cable, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera to the computer with the provided interface cable, then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided

www.devicemanuals.eut recognize the card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eut recognize the card.


Display Problems

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display Problems



In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and www.devicemanuals.eu

The menu screen shows few tabs and options.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The menu screen shows few tabs and options.


286

It is a movie file (p.171).

The correct date and time has not been set (p.34).

The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.241).

If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.207).

[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect tab set to the LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection status or disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.265).

What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.240).

The file name starts with “MVI_”.

The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.

The date and time is not in the picture.

[###] is displayed.

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.

Printing-Related Problems

There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual.


The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euinformation. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupicture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information

If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera ] will be displayed (p.207).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] will be displayed (p.207).



] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into


the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect tab set to the LOCK

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect tab set to the LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection status or www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection status or disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.265).www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.265).www.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


287

If there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the on-screen instructions.

* If the error still persists, write down the error No. and contact your nearest Canon Service Center.

Error Codes

No. Error Message & Solution

01

Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the lens contacts.

Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens and use a Canon lens (p.15, 18).

02

Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card with camera.

Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the card (p.29, 45).

04Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.

Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card (p.29, 224, 45).

05The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on again.

Operate the power switch (p.32).

06Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on again.

Operate the power switch (p.32).

10, 20,30, 40,50, 60,70, 80

Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and on again or re-install the battery.

Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack again, or use a Canon lens (p.32, 28).

Error No.

Countermeasures


Error Message & Solution

www.devic

eman

uals.

euError Message & Solution

www.devicemanuals.euCommunications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCommunications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the


the camera and lens and use a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu the camera and lens and use a


Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card


Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the







Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.


Replace the card, erase unnecessa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Replace the card, erase unnecessa(p.29, 224, 45).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.29, 224, 45).




The built-in flash could not be rawww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The built-in flash could not be rawww.devicemanuals.eu

288

• TypeType: Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flashRecording media: SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory cardImage sensor size: Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mmCompatible lenses: Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)

(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the lens focal length)

Lens mount: Canon EF mount

• Image SensorType: CMOS sensorEffective pixels: Approx. 18.00 megapixelsAspect ratio: 3:2Dust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending

• Recording SystemRecording format: Design rule for Camera File System 2.0Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)

RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possibleRecorded pixels: L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)

M (Medium) : Approx. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)RAW : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)

• Image Processing During ShootingPicture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,

Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3Basic+: Shoot by ambience selection, Shoot by lighting or scene typeWhite balance: Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,

White fluorescent light, Flash), CustomWhite balance correction and white balance bracketing features provided* Flash color temperature information communication provided

Noise reduction: Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shotsAutomatic image brightness correction: Auto Lighting OptimizerHighlight tone priority: ProvidedLens peripheral illumination correction: Provided

Specifications

www.devicemanuals.euDust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending

for Camera File System 2.0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufor Camera File System 2.0

Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possibleRecorded pixels: L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recorded pixels: L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)M (Medium) : Approx. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

M (Medium) : Approx. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)


S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)RAW : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RAW : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)

• Image Processing During Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Image Processing During ShootingAuto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful, www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,

289

Specifications

• ViewfinderType: Eye-level pentamirrorCoverage: Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx. 19 mm)Magnification: Approx. 0.85x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)Eye point: Approx. 19 mm (From eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)Built-in dioptric adjustment: Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)Focusing screen: Fixed, Precision MatteMirror: Quick-return typeDepth-of-field preview: Provided

• AutofocusType: TTL secondary image-registration, phase detectionAF points: 9 AF pointsMetering range: EV -0.5 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)Focus modes: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing

(MF)AF-assist beam: Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash

• Exposure ControlMetering modes: 63-zone TTL full-aperture metering

• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)• Partial metering (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center)• Spot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center)• Center-weighted average metering

Metering range: EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)

Exposure control: Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Night Portrait, Program), shutter-priority AE, aperture-priority AE, manual exposure, automatic depth-of-field AE

ISO speed: Basic Zone modes: ISO 100 - 3200 set automatically(Recommended Creative Zone modes : ISO 100 - 6400 set manuallyexposure index) (whole-stop increments), ISO 100 - 6400 set

automatically, maximum ISO speed settable for ISO Auto, or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800)

Exposure compensation: Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop incrementsAEB: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (Can be

combined with manual exposure compensation)AE lock: Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative

metering when focus is achievedManual: By AE lock button


TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTTL secondary image-registration, phase detection

Metering range: EV -0.5 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMetering range: EV -0.5 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)Focus modes: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFocus modes: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing

flashes fired by built-in flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

flashes fired by built-in flash

Metering modes: 63-zone TTL full-aperture metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Metering modes: 63-zone TTL full-aperture metering• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)• Partial metering (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Partial metering (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center)• Spot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Spot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center)


• Center-weighted average metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Center-weighted average meteringMetering range: EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Metering range: EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ISO 100)Exposure control: Program AE (Scene In

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Exposure control: Program AE (Scene In

Specifications

290

• ShutterType: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutterShutter speeds: 1/4000 sec. to 1/60 sec. (Scene Intelligent Auto mode),

X-sync at 1/200 sec.1/4000 sec. to 30 sec., bulb (Total shutter speed range. Available range varies by shooting mode.)

• FlashBuilt-in flash: Retractable, auto pop-up flash

Guide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of viewRecycling time approx. 3 sec.Wireless master unit function provided

External flash: EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the camera)

Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflashFlash exposure compensation: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop incrementsFE lock: ProvidedPC terminal: None

• Drive SystemDrive mode: Single shooting, continuous shooting, self-timer with 10-sec.

or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shootingContinuous shooting speed: Max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec.Max. burst: JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 34 shots

RAW: Approx. 6 shotsRAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 3 shots* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO

100 and “Standard” Picture Style) using a 4GB card.

• Live View ShootingAspect ratio settings: 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1Focusing: Live mode, Face detection Live mode (Contrast

detection), Quick mode (Phase-difference detection)Manual focusing (Approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)

Metering modes: Evaluative metering with the image sensorMetering range: EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens,

ISO 100)Grid display: Two types

www.devicemanuals.euWireless master unit function provided

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless master unit function providedExternal flash: EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euExternal flash: EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the

: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

Single shooting, continuous shooting, self-timer with 10-sec.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Single shooting, continuous shooting, self-timer with 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec.Max. burst: JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 34 shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Max. burst: JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 34 shotsRAW: Approx. 6 shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RAW: Approx. 6 shotsRAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 3 shotswww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 3 shots

291

Specifications

• Movie ShootingMovie compression: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Variable (average) bit rateAudio recording format: Linear PCMRecording format: MOVRecording sizeand frame rate: 1920x1080 (Full HD) : 30p/25p/24p

1280x720 (HD) : 60p/50p640x480 (SD) : 30p/25p* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.976 fps, 60p:

59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fpsFile size: 1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.

1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MB/min.

Focusing: Same as focusing with Live View shootingMetering modes: Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with

the image sensor* Automatically set by the focusing mode

Metering range: EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)Exposure control: Program AE for movies and manual exposureExposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)ISO speed: With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within(Recommended ISO 100 - 6400exposure index) With manual exposure, ISO 100 - 6400 set automatically/

manuallyDigital zoom: Approx. 3x - 10xVideo snapshots: Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.Sound recording: Built-in monaural microphone

External stereo microphone terminal providedSound recording level adjustable, wind filter provided

Grid display: Two types• LCD MonitorType: TFT color liquid-crystal monitorMonitor size and dots: Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0 inches) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million

dotsAngle adjustment: PossibleBrightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)Interface languages: 25Feature guide: Displayable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MB/min.Same as focusing with Live View shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSame as focusing with Live View shooting

Metering modes: Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMetering modes: Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with

the image sensor

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the image sensor* Automatically set by the focusing mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* Automatically set by the focusing modeEV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)Exposure control: Program AE fo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Exposure control: Program AE for movies and manual exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

r movies and manual exposure: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)ISO speed: With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ISO speed: With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within(Recommended ISO 100 - 6400

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Recommended ISO 100 - 6400exposure index) With manual exposure,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

exposure index) With manual exposure,manually

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

manually

Video snapshots: Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Video snapshots: Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.

Specifications

292

• PlaybackImage display formats: Single image, Single image + Info (Basic info, shooting

info, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image index, image rotate possible

Zoom magnification: Approx. 1.5x - 10xImage browsing methods: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting

date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by ratingHighlight alert: Overexposed highlights blinkMovie playback: Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)

Built-in speakerSlide show: All images, by date, by folder, movies, stills, or by rating

Five transition effects selectableBackground music: Selectable for slide shows and movie playbackBass boost: Provided

• Post-Processing of ImagesCreative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera

effect, Miniature effectResize: Possible

• Direct PrintingCompatible printers: PictBridge-compatible printersPrintable images: JPEG and RAW imagesPrint ordering: DPOF Version 1.1 compatible

• Custom FunctionsCustom Functions: 11My Menu registration: PossibleCopyright information: Entry and inclusion possible

• InterfaceAudio/video OUT/Digital terminal: Analog video (Compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio output

For personal computer communication and direct printing (Hi-Speed USB equivalent)

HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatibleExternal microphone IN terminal: 3.5mm dia. stereo mini-jackRemote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3Wireless remote control: Remote Controller RC-6Eye-Fi card: Compatible

www.devicemanuals.euBackground music: Selectable for slide shows and movie playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBackground music: Selectable for slide shows and movie playback

Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

effect, Miniature effect

Compatible printers: PictBridge-compatible printers

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Compatible printers: PictBridge-compatible printersPrintable images: JPEG and RAW images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Printable images: JPEG and RAW imagesPrint ordering: DPOF Version 1.1 compatible

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Print ordering: DPOF Version 1.1 compatible

Custom Functions: 11

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom Functions: 11My Menu registration: Possiblewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

My Menu registration: PossibleCopyright information: Entry and inclusion possiblewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Copyright information: Entry and inclusion possible

293

Specifications

• PowerBattery: Battery Pack LP-E8 (Quantity 1)

* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8* With Battery Grip BG-E8 attached, size-AA/LR6

batteries can be usedBattery life: With viewfinder shooting:(Based on CIPA Approx. 440 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 400 shots at 0°C/32°Ftesting standards) With Live View shooting:

Approx. 180 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 150 shots at 0°C/32°FMovie shooting time Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 23°C/73°F

Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at 0°C/32°F(With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8)

• Dimensions and WeightDimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 133.1 x 99.5 x 79.7 mm / 5.2 x 3.9 x 3.1 in.Weight: Approx. 570 g / 20.1 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),

Approx. 515 g / 18.2 oz. (Body only)

• Operation EnvironmentWorking temperature range: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°FWorking humidity: 85% or less

• Battery Pack LP-E8Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion batteryRated voltage: 7.2 V DCBattery capacity: 1120 mAhWorking temperature range: During charging: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F

During shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°FWorking humidity: 85% or lessDimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 37.1 x 15.4 x 55.2 mm / 1.5 x 0.6 x 2.2 in.Weight: Approx. 52 g / 1.8 oz.

• Battery Charger LC-E8Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E8Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 720 mAWorking temperature range: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°FWorking humidity: 85% or lessDimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.Weight: Approx. 82 g / 2.9 oz.


(With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8)

: Approx. 133.1 x 99.5 x 79.7 mm / 5.2 x 3.9 x 3.1 in.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Approx. 133.1 x 99.5 x 79.7 mm / 5.2 x 3.9 x 3.1 in.

Weight: Approx. 570 g / 20.1 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWeight: Approx. 570 g / 20.1 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°FWorking humidity: 85% or less

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Working humidity: 85% or less

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rechargeable lithium-ion batteryRated voltage: 7.2 V DC

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rated voltage: 7.2 V DC


Battery capacity: 1120 mAh

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Battery capacity: 1120 mAhWorking temperature range

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Working temperature range: During charging: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: During charging: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or lesswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Working humidity: 85% or less

Specifications

294

• Battery Charger LC-E8ECompatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E8Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 720 mAWorking temperature range: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°FWorking humidity: 85% or lessDimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.Weight: Approx. 82 g / 2.9 oz.

• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS IIAngle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’

Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’

Lens construction: 11 elements in 9 groupsMinimum aperture: f/22 - 36Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)Max. magnification: 0.34x (at 55 mm)Field of view: 207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at 0.25

m / 0.82 ft.)Image Stabilizer: Lens shift typeFilter size: 58 mmLens cap: E-58Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70 mm / 2.7 x 2.8 in.Weight: Approx. 200 g / 7.1 oz.Hood: EW-60C (sold separately)Case: LP814 (sold separately)

• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IIIAngle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’


Lens construction: 11 elements in 9 groupsMinimum aperture: f/22 - 36Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)Max. magnification: 0.34x (at 55mm)Field of view: 207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at

0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)Filter size: 58 mmLens cap: E-58Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70.0 mm / 2.7 x 2.8 in.


: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)

207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at 0.25

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at 0.25

Image Stabilizer: Lens shift type

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image Stabilizer: Lens shift type

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70 mm / 2.7 x 2.8 in.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Approx. 200 g / 7.1 oz.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Approx. 200 g / 7.1 oz.EW-60C (sold separately)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EW-60C (sold separately)LP814 (sold separately)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

LP814 (sold separately)

295

Specifications

Weight: Approx. 195 g / 6.9 oz.Hood: EW-60C (sold separately)Case: LP814 (sold separately)

• EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 ISAngle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 11°30’


Lens construction: 16 elements in 12 groupsMinimum aperture: f/22 - 36Closest focusing distance*: At 18mm focal length: 0.49 m / 1.61 ft.

(327 x 503 mm / 12.9 x 19.8 in. field of view)At 135mm focal length: 0.45 m / 1.48 ft. (75 x 112 mm / 3.0 x 4.4 in. field of view)* Distance from image sensor plane

Max. magnification: 0.21x (at 135mm)Image Stabilizer: Lens shift typeFilter size: 67 mmLens cap: E-67Max. diameter x length: Approx. 75.4 x 101 mm / 3.0 x 4.0 in.Weight: Approx. 455 g / 16.0 oz.Hood: EW-73B (sold separately)Case: LP1116 (sold separately)

All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the respective lens maker.



*: At 18mm focal length: 0.49 m / 1.61 ft.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu*: At 18mm focal length: 0.49 m / 1.61 ft.

(327 x 503 mm / 12.9 x 19.8 in. field of view)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(327 x 503 mm / 12.9 x 19.8 in. field of view)At 135mm focal length: 0.45 m / 1.48 ft.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAt 135mm focal length: 0.45 m / 1.48 ft. (75 x 112 mm / 3.0 x 4.4 in. field of view)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(75 x 112 mm / 3.0 x 4.4 in. field of view)* Distance from image sensor plane

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu* Distance from image sensor plane


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 75.4 x 101 mm / 3.0 x 4.0 in.Weight: Approx. 455 g / 16.0 oz.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Weight: Approx. 455 g / 16.0 oz.Hood: EW-73B (sold separately)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Hood: EW-73B (sold separately)


Case: LP1116 (sold separately)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Case: LP1116 (sold separately)

All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on

296

TrademarksAdobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”* Notice displayed in English as required.

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommendedThis product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”* Notice displayed in English as required.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* Notice displayed in English as required.


Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommendedThis product is designed to achieve

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This product is designed to achieve genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-

297

Safety WarningsFollow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death, and material damage.

Preventing Serious Injury or Death• To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the

safeguards below:- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this

booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do

not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.

- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not mix new and old or different types of batteries.

- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.

- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera, accessories, connecting cables, etc.

• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)

• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent fire or an explosion.

• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging, immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging and prevent a fire.

• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.

• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a physician immediately.

• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.

• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When

using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter away.• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and

disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and fire.

• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or fire.


- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not

- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euof 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.

- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,



• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a • Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)



• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts • When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent




• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging, • If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging, immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging



• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or • If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.




• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can • Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a

298

• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.

• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock.

• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens. Doing so may damage your vision.

• Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally choke the child.

• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed. Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.

• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:- Always insert the power plug all the way in.- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.

Also do not twist or tie the cords.- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.

• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The

equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause

injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap

attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap

heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera,

promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.

• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment. Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.



www.devicemanuals.eu• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.

- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.










• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around • Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.




• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause • Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.




• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap • Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.

299

European Union (and EEA) only.These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or your national laws implementing those Directives. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive,

this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/environment.(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)


This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an

a new similar product or to an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment

www.devic

eman

uals.

euauthorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucould have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupotentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the

For more information about the recycling of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For more information about the recycling of this product, pl

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

this product, plFor more information about the recycling of this product, plFor more information about the recycling of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For more information about the recycling of this product, plFor more information about the recycling oflocal city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste

www.canon-europe.com/environment

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.canon-europe.com/environment



(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)


300

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety

and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E8 & LC-E8E.2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on

(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery pack.

3. CAUTION — To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E8. Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other damage.

4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in

fire, electric shock, or personal injury.6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than

by cord when disconnecting charger.7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or

otherwise subjected to damage or stress.8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them

immediately.9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,

or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified serviceman when

service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire.

11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONUnless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.

CAUTIONRISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.


6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than

7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or

8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them

9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,

or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified serviceman when

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified serviceman when service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of

11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet before

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet before


attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONUnless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Unless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.




RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. www.devicemanuals.eu

301

14Software Start Guide

This chapter gives an overview of the software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM) provided with the camera and explains how to install the software in a personal computer. It also explains how to view the pdf files in the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD-ROM).

EOS Solution Disk(Software)

EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk

Windows XXX XXX


Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX



CEL-XXX XXX



XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX


www.devicemanuals.euSoftware Start Guide

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSoftware Start Guide

This chapter gives an overview of the software in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter gives an overview of the software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM) provided with the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM) provided with the camera and explains how to install the software in a personal

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and explains how to install the software in a personal computer. It also explains how to view the pdf files in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

computer. It also explains how to view the pdf files in the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD-ROM).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD-ROM).









EOS Solution Disk XXX www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EOS Solution Disk XXX www.devicemanuals.eu


302

Software Start Guide

EOS Solution DiskThis disk contains various software for EOS cameras.

Communication Software for the Camera and Computer

You can download images (still photos/movies) you have shot with the camera to your computer.You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera with your computer.You can copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*, to the card.

* Five original tracks provided by Canon, which you can play as background music during playback of video snapshot albums, movies, and slide shows on the camera.

Image Viewing and Editing Software

You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-speed.You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals. It is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.


You can view, edit and print JPEG images on your computer.You can organize and sort images by shooting date or theme.You can play and edit movies (MOV files), video snapshot albums, and extract still photos from movies.Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first time and amateur users.

Picture Style File Creating Software

This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images.You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create/save an original Picture Style file.

a EOS Utility

b Digital Photo Professional

c ZoomBrowser EX (Windows) / ImageBrowser (Macintosh)

d Picture Style Editor


CEL-XXX XXX



XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*,

Five original tracks provided by Canon, which you can play as background music during

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFive original tracks provided by Canon, which you can play as background music during playback of video snapshot albums, movies, and slide shows on the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euplayback of video snapshot albums, movies, and slide shows on the camera.

You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-

You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals. It is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

It is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



You can view, edit and print JPEG images on your computer.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can view, edit and print JPEG images on your computer.You can organize and sort images by shooting date or theme.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

You can organize and sort images by shooting date or theme.www.devicemanuals.eu

ZoomBrowser EX (Win

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ZoomBrowser EX (Win

303


Compatible OS

1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.

2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).

3 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.

Follow the windows displayed for the rest of the installation procedure.

B When installation ends, the window for Step 4 appears.

4 Click [Restart].

5 Once your computer has restarted, remove the CD.To download images from the cameras, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (PDF electronic manual). “WFT Utility” and “Original Data Security Tools” software for the accessories (sold separately) will also be installed. If not necessary, uninstall the software.

Installing the Software

Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the software. The software will not be installed correctly.

Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP


Follow the windows displayed for the rest of the installation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


When installation ends, the window for Step

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


[Restart]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Restart].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

304


Compatible OS

1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.

2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click [Canon EOS Digital Installer].

3 Click [Install] to start installation.

Follow the windows displayed for the rest of the installation procedure.When installation ends, the window for Step 4 appears.

4 Click [Finish].

5 Remove the CD.To download images from the cameras, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (PDF electronic manual). “WFT Utility” software for the accessories (sold separately) will also be installed. If not necessary, uninstall the software.

Installing the Software

MAC OS X 10.5 - 10.6 (Intel processor required)

H104_HG_EN.book Monday, March 19, 2012 10:45 AM



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

305


[WINDOWS]

EOS Software Instruction Manuals DiskCopy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your computer.

1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

2 Open the disk.Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop and then double-click the CD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.

Select your language and operating system. The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed.

[MACINTOSH]

EOS Software Instruction Manuals DiskCopy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your Macintosh.

1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the CD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.

2 Open the disk.Double-click on the disk icon.

3 Double-click the START.html file.Select your language and operating system. The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed.

Acrobat Reader (version 6.0 or later) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your computer. To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe Reader.

Acrobat Reader (version 6.0 or later) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your Macintosh. To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe Reader.

Windows XXX XXX


Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX


Windows XXX XXX


Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX



the CD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe CD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.

Select your language and operating system. The index of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect your language and operating system. The index of the



EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EOS Software Instruction Manuals DiskCopy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your Macintosh.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your Macintosh.


Acrobat Reader (version 6.0 or later) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAcrobat Reader (version 6.0 or later) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual

is not already installed on your computer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu is not already installed on your computer.

To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe


Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the CD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

CD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.www.devicemanuals.eu

306


307

15Quick Reference Guide and

Instruction Manual IndexMenu Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.308Image-recording Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.309A Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.309Q Quick Control Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.310Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.311Basic Zone Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313D Using the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314

d: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314s: Shutter-priority AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314f: Aperture-priority AE- - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314

E: AF Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.315S AF Point - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.315Z: ISO Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.316i Drive Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.316A Live View Shooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.317k Shooting Movies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.318Image Playback- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.319



Quick Reference Guide and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euQuick Reference Guide and

Instruction Manual Index

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInstruction Manual IndexMenu Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.308

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Menu Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.308Image-recording Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.309

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image-recording Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.309 Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.309

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.309 Quick Control Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.310

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.310


Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.311

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.311Basic Zone Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Basic Zone Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313 Using the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314

308

Quick Reference Guide

<M>

button

LCD

monitor <S>

Cross keys

<0> button

1. Press the <M> button to display the menu.

2. Press the key to select a tab, then press the <V>

key to select the desired item.

3. Press <0> to display the setting.

4. After setting the item, press <0>.

Menu Operations

Tabs

Menu settingsMenu items

Creative Zone Modes

Basic Zone Modes Movie Shooting Mode

www.devicemanuals.eu> button to display the menu.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to display the menu.

> key to select a tab, then press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select a tab, then press the <

> to display the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> to display the setting.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

Creative Zone www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative Zone


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

309


� Select [1 Quality], then press <0>.

� Press the key to select the quality, then press <0>.

� For <S> (Neutral) and (Faithful), see page 82.

Image-recording Quality


Recorded pixels

Possible shots

� Press the <A> button.

� Press the key to select the

Picture Style, then press <0>.

A Picture StyleN

Style

D Auto

P Standard

Q Portrait

R Landscape

V Monochrome

Description

Color tones optimized for the particular scene.

Vivid colors and sharp images.

Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images.

Vivid blue skies and greenery and very sharp images.

Black-and-white images.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devicemanuals.euPossible shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPossible shots

P

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ress the <

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

Picture Style, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style, then press <

310

Q Quick Control� Press the <Q> button.

� The Quick Control screen will

appear.

Shutter speed Aperture


ISO speed

Picture Style

Exposure compensation/

AEB setting

Shooting mode

Flash exposure compensation

Built-in flash function

White balance

Drive mode


AF mode

Metering mode


� In Basic Zone modes, the settable functions differ depending

on the shooting mode.

� Press the <S> key to select a function, then turn the <6>

dial to set it.

Basic Zone Modes Creative Zone Modes


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




































Creative Zone Modes

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCreative Zone Modes

311


Access lamp

<O> Aperture/Exposurecompensation button

<A> Live View shooting/Movie shooting button

<S> AF pointselection button

<A> AE lock button

<0> Setting button

<S> Cross keys

Nomenclature

Focus mode switch

Shutter button

Mode DialPower switch

<Z> ISO speedsetting button

<D> Flashbutton

<6> Main Dial











































































> Live View shooting/

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> Live View shooting/Movie shooting button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie shooting button

312

Shutter speed

ISO speed

Aperture

Shooting mode

Possible shots


Built-in flashfunc. setting

Metering mode

White balance


Exposure levelindicator

Drive mode

Battery check

zxcnOK NG

Monochrome shootingFlash exposurecompensation

Shutter speed


Shooting Settings Display

ISO speed

AF points

AF point activation indicator <•>

Spot meteringcircle

Focus confirmation light

Aperture

Max. burst

AE lock

Flash-ready


Picture Style

AF mode

Quick Controlicon


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu






func. setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufunc. setting

Metering mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Metering mode

Image-recording

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage-recordingquality

www.devic

eman

uals.

euquality





Drive mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Drive mode


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


AF points www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF points

313


All the settings necessary for

shooting are set automatically. You

just press the shutter button, and

the camera does the rest.

Basic Zone Modes

Basic Zone ModesIf necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically in

low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <7> <3> <5>

modes).


Creative Zone Modes� Press the <D> button to raise the

built-in flash, then shoot.

Basic Zone

� Pressing the <Q> button will display the Quick Control screen.

In the C/2/3/4/5/6 shooting mode, press the <V>

key to select the function, then press the key or turn

the <6> dial to set it as desired.

A Scene Intelligent Auto

7 Flash Off

C Creative Auto

2 Portrait

3 Landscape

4 Close-up

5 Sports

6 Night Portrait


Landscape

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Landscape

Close-up

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Close-up

Sports

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Sports



Basic Zone Modes

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Basic Zone ModesIf necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically in www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically in

low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <

Using the Built-in Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using the Built-in Flash

> button will display the Quick Control screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button will display the Quick Control screen.

shooting mode, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting mode, press the <

key to select the function, then press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

key to select the function, then press the <

> dial to set it as desired.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial to set it as desired.

Night Portrait

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Night Portrait

314

� Set the Mode Dial to <d>.

You can change the camera

settings as desired to shoot in

various ways.

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and

aperture in the same way as the <A> mode.

Creative Zone Modes

d: Program AE

� Set the Mode Dial to <s>.

� Turn the <6> dial to set the

desired shutter speed, then focus the

subject.

� The aperture will be set automatically.

� If the aperture display blinks, turn the

<6> dial until it stops blinking.

� Set the Mode Dial to <f>.

� Turn the <6> dial to set the desired

aperture, then focus the subject.

� The shutter speed will be set

automatically.

� If the shutter speed display blinks, turn

the <6> dial until it stops blinking.

s: Shutter-priority AE

f: Aperture-priority AE

Cre

ative

Zone



www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe camera automatically sets the shutter speed and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe camera automatically sets the shutter speed and

> mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> mode.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject.

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� The aperture will be set automatically.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The aperture will be set automatically.

: Aperture-priority AEwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Aperture-priority AE

315


� Press the <S> button.

� Press the <S> key to select the

AF point.

� While looking through the

viewfinder, you can select the

AF point by turning the <6>

dial until the desired AF point

flashes in red.

� Pressing <0> toggles the AF

point selection between the

center AF point and automatic

AF point selection.

S AF PointN

� Set the lens focus mode switch

to <f>.

� Press the <ZE> button.

� Press the key or turn the

<6> dial to select the AF

mode, then press <0>.

X(One-Shot AF):

For still subjects

9(AI Focus AF):

Switches the AF mode

automatically

Z(AI Servo AF):

For moving subjects

E: AF ModeN

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(One-Shot AF):

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(One-Shot AF):

For still subjects

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu For still subjects

www.devicemanuals.eu(AI Focus AF):

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(AI Focus AF):

Switches the AF mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Switches the AF mode

automatically

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautomatically

Z

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Z









www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

(AI Servo AF):

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(AI Servo AF):

For moving subjects

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For moving subjects

316

� Press the <Z> button.


<6> dial to select the ISO

speed, then press <0>.

� When [AUTO] is selected, the

ISO speed is set automatically.

When you press the shutter

button halfway, the ISO speed

setting will be displayed.

Z: ISO SpeedN

� Press the <YiQ> button.


<6> dial to select the drive

mode, then press <0>.

u : Single shooting

i : Continuous shooting

Q : Self-timer:10 sec/Remote

control*

l : Self-timer:2 sec

q : Self-timer:Continuous*

* The <Q> and <q> drive

modes can be selected in all

shooting modes (except <k>).

i Drive ModeN














www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

















When you press the shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen you press the shutter

button halfway, the ISO speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton halfway, the ISO speed

setting will be displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusetting will be displayed.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<

317


Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Use

At 23°C / 73°F Approx. 200 shots Approx. 180 shots

� Press the <A> button to display

the Live View image.

A Live View Shooting

� Press the shutter button halfway

to focus.

� Press the shutter button


� Live View shooting settings will appear under the [2] menu

tab in Basic Zone modes and under the [z] menu tab in

Creative Zone modes.

� Battery Life with Live View Shooting
















www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Press the shutter button halfway

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Press the shutter button halfway

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Live View shooting settings will appear under the [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Live View shooting settings will appear under the [

318

k Shooting Movies� Set the Mode Dial to <k>.


halfway to focus.

� Press the <A> button to start

shooting a movie.

� To stop movie shooting, press

the <A> button again.

Recording movie

Microphone


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Press the <A

www.devic

eman

uals.

euA> button to start

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to start

shooting a movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting a movie.

To stop movie shooting, press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To stop movie shooting, press

the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the <A

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A

Recording movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recording movie

319


Image Playback

MagnifyIndex

y u y u

C Erase

Playbackx

L

Select image

Shooting information

S


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu







































www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





www.devicemanuals.euMagnify

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMagnify

C

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C

320

10-sec. or 2-sec. delay ...................891280x720......................................1501920x1080....................................1501st-curtain sync.............................1822nd-curtain sync ...........................1824- or 9-image index display...........202640x480........................................1509-point AF auto selection ................85

AAC Adapter Kit ..............................260Access lamp ...................................30Accessories ......................................3A-DEP (Automatic Depth-of-Field AE)......101Adobe RGB...................................121AE lock..........................................107AEB.......................................105, 252AF (Focusing) ...........................83, 85AF point ..........................................85AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)................84AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ................84AI Servo AF ..............................53, 84Aperture-priority AE ........................96Aspect ratio...................................234Audio/video OUT ..................210, 221Auto Lighting Optimizer ..........49, 109Auto playback ...............................215Auto power off.........................32, 167Auto reset .....................................171Auto rotate of vertical images .......174Autofocus..................................83, 85Automatic selection of AF point ......85Av (Aperture-priority AE).................96A/V OUT ...............................210, 221

BB/W (Monochrome).................82, 114

Background music........................ 217Basic Zone modes ......................... 22Bass boost ................................... 213Battery................................ 26, 28, 33Battery check ................................. 33Battery Grip ............................ 33, 276Beeper.......................................... 166Black-and-white image..... 65, 82, 114Bracketing ............................ 105, 120Brightness (exposure) .................. 103

Adjust (exposure compensation) ........ 103Auto exposure bracketing (AEB) ............................... 105, 252Autoexposure lock (AE lock).... 107Measurement method (Metering mode) ...................... 102

Built-in flash.................................... 90BULB (Bulb exposure) ................. 100

CC (Creative Auto)......................... 56Cable................ 3, 218, 221, 236, 277Camera

Camera shake ......................... 122Clear camera settings.............. 176Holding the camera.................... 39Settings display........................ 175

Camera shake.......................... 38, 39Card ................................... 15, 29, 45

Card reminder.......................... 166Eye-Fi ...................................... 265Format ....................................... 45Problem ............................... 30, 46SD speed class........................ 141SDHC/SDXC.............................. 29Write-protect .............................. 29

Center-weighted average metering ....................................... 102Charger .................................... 24, 26

Index

www.devicemanuals.eu(exposure compensation) ........ 103

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(exposure compensation) ........ 103Auto exposure bracketing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto exposure bracketing (AEB) ............................... 105, 252

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(AEB) ............................... 105, 252Autoexposure lock (AE lock).... 107

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAutoexposure lock (AE lock).... 107Measurement method

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMeasurement method





AF (Focusing) ...........................83, 85

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF (Focusing) ...........................83, 85AF point ..........................................85

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF point ..........................................85AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)................84

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)................84AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ................84

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ................84AI Servo AF ..............................53, 84

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AI Servo AF ..............................53, 84Aperture-priority AE ........................96

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aperture-priority AE ........................96Aspect ratio...................................234www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Aspect ratio...................................234Audio/video OUT ..................210, 221www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Audio/video OUT ..................210, 221

(Metering mode) ...................... 102

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Metering mode) ...................... 102Built-in flash.................................... 90

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Built-in flash.................................... 90BULB (Bulb exposure) ................. 100

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

BULB (Bulb exposure) ................. 100

321

Index

Cleaning (Image sensor).......184, 187Clear camera settings...................176Close-ups........................................61Color space (color reproduction range).............121Color temperature .........................117Color tone .....................................113Continuous....................................170Continuous shooting .......................88Contrast ........................................113Copyright information....................172Creative Auto ..................................56Creative filters ...............................230M icon..............................................4Creative Zone modes......................22Custom Functions.........................250Custom WB...................................117

DDate/Time .......................................34DC coupler ....................................260Depth-of-field preview.....................98Dial............................................18, 93Digital terminal ......................221, 236Dioptric adjustment .........................39Direct printing................................235DPOF............................................245Drive mode..........................20, 58, 88Dust Delete Data...........................185

EErase (image) ...............................224Error codes ...................................287Evaluative metering ......................102Exposure compensation ...............103Exposure level increments............252Extension ......................................171External Speedlite .........................263

Eyecup ......................................... 262Eye-Fi card ................................... 265Eyepiece cover....................... 25, 262

FFaithful............................................ 82FE lock ......................................... 108Feature guide ................................. 48FEB .............................................. 181File name...................................... 170File size .......................... 76, 151, 226Filter effect............................ 114, 230Final image simulation.......... 127, 147Fine (Image-recording quality) ....... 76Firmware Ver. ............................... 272Fish-eye effect.............................. 232Flash

Built-in flash ............................... 90Custom Functions .................... 183Effective range ........................... 90External Speedlite .................... 263FE lock ..................................... 108Flash control ............................ 180Flash exposure compensation........................... 104Flash off ......................... 55, 58, 64Flash-sync speed............. 252, 264Manual flash..................... 182, 199Red-eye reduction...................... 91Shutter sync. (1st/2nd curtain) ....................... 182Wireless ................................... 189

Flash exposure compensation ..... 104Flash mode................................... 182Flash-sync contacts........................ 18Focus confirmation light ................. 50Focus lock ...................................... 53Focus mode switch........... 36, 87, 138

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFilter effect............................ 114, 230

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFilter effect............................ 114, 230






Date/Time .......................................34

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Date/Time .......................................34DC coupler ....................................260

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

DC coupler ....................................260Depth-of-field preview.....................98

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depth-of-field preview.....................98Dial............................................18, 93

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Dial............................................18, 93Digital terminal ......................221, 236

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Digital terminal ......................221, 236Dioptric adjustment .........................39www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Dioptric adjustment .........................39Direct printing................................235www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Direct printing................................235

Final image simulation.......... 127, 147

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFinal image simulation.......... 127, 147Fine (Image-recording quality) ....... 76

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFine (Image-recording quality) ....... 76Firmware Ver. ............................... 272

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFirmware Ver. ............................... 272Fish-eye effect.............................. 232

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Fish-eye effect.............................. 232Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash

322

Index

FocusingAF mode.....................................83AF point selection.......................85AF-assist beam ..................86, 255Beeper......................................166Difficult-to-focus subjects....87, 135Manual focusing .................87, 138Out of focus ............38, 39, 87, 135Recompose ................................53

Folder Create/Select.....................168Format ............................................45Format (card initialization) ..............45Frame rate ....................................150Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...50Full High-Definition (Full HD) ...............................150, 210Function availability table..............268

GGrainy B/W ...................................232Grid display...........................129, 161

HHDMI.....................................210, 218HDMI CEC....................................219High ISO speed noise reduction ...254High-Definition (HD)..............150, 210Highlight alert................................228Highlight tone priority ............159, 254Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ........228Hot shoe .......................................263Household power..........................260

IICC profile .................................... 121Image

Auto playback .......................... 215Auto rotate ............................... 174Erase ....................................... 224Highlight alert ........................... 228Histogram ................................ 228Image characteristics (Picture Style) ............ 81, 112, 115Index ........................................ 202Jump display (Image browsing) ..................... 203Magnified view ......................... 204Manual rotate........................... 205No. ........................................... 170Playback ............................ 71, 201Protect ..................................... 222Review time ............................. 166Shooting information................ 226Transfer.................................... 265View on TV ...................... 210, 218

Image area ..................................... 37Image dust prevention.. 184, 185, 187Image review time ........................ 166Image Stabilizer (lens).................... 38Image Zone .................................... 22Image-recording quality.................. 76Index display ................................ 202ISO speed ...................................... 79

Auto ........................................... 80ISO expansion ......................... 252Maximum ISO speed with ISO Auto .................................... 80

JJPEG.............................................. 76Jump display ................................ 203

www.devicemanuals.eu(Image browsing) ..................... 203

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Image browsing) ..................... 203






Grid display...........................129, 161

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Grid display...........................129, 161

HDMI.....................................210, 218

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDMI.....................................210, 218HDMI CEC....................................219

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDMI CEC....................................219High ISO speed noise reduction ...254

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

High ISO speed noise reduction ...254High-Definition (HD)..............150, 210www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

High-Definition (HD)..............150, 210Highlight alert................................228www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Highlight alert................................228

Magnified view ......................... 204

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMagnified view ......................... 204Manual rotate........................... 205

www.devic

eman

uals.

euManual rotate........................... 205No. ........................................... 170

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNo. ........................................... 170Playback ............................ 71, 201

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPlayback ............................ 71, 201Protect ..................................... 222

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Protect ..................................... 222Review time ............................. 166

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Review time ............................. 166Shooting information................ 226

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting information................ 226

323

Index

LLandscape ................................60, 82Language selection.........................35Large (Image-recording quality)......76LCD monitor....................................15

Brightness adjustment ..............167Image playback ..................71, 201Menu screen.......................43, 270Screen color .............................179Shooting settings display......20, 47Vari-Angle .............................31, 54

Lens ..........................................23, 36Image Stabilizer ..........................38Lock release ...............................37Peripheral illumination correction..................................110

Live View shooting ..................54, 123Aspect ratio...............................129Face detection Live mode (AF)...........................................132Grid display...............................129Information display ...................126Live mode (AF) .........................131Manual focusing .................87, 138Metering timer...........................130Possible shots ..........................125Quick Control............................128Quick mode (AF) ......................136

Long exposure noise reduction.....253Long exposures ............................100Low-level format..............................46

MM (Manual exposure) ......................99Macro photography .........................61Magnified view ......................138, 204Malfunction....................................278Manual exposure ....................99, 144Manual focus (MF) ..................87, 138Manual reset .................................171

Manual selection (AF) .................... 85Maximum burst......................... 76, 77Medium (Image-recording quality).................................... 76, 234Memory card ...................... 15, 29, 45Menu .............................................. 43

My Menu .................................. 258Setting procedure....................... 44Settings .................................... 270

3 icon......................................... 4Metering mode ............................. 102Metering timer ...................... 130, 161MF (Manual focusing)............. 87, 138Microphone................................... 142Miniature effect............................. 232Mirror lockup......................... 122, 255Mode Dial ....................................... 22Monochrome .................... 65, 82, 114Movie............................................ 141

AF mode .......................... 149, 157Autoexposure........................... 142Editing out first and last scenes...................................... 214Enjoying ................................... 210File size.................................... 151Frame rate ............................... 150Grid display .............................. 161Information display................... 146Manual exposure ..................... 144Manual focusing....................... 142Metering timer .......................... 161Movie digital zoom ................... 152Movie recording size ................ 150Playback .................................. 212Quick Control ........................... 149Recording time......................... 151Sound recording....................... 160Still photo shooting................... 148Video snapshots....................... 153Video snapshots album............ 153View on TV....................... 210, 218


(AF)...........................................132

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(AF)...........................................132Grid display...............................129

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Grid display...............................129Information display ...................126

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Information display ...................126Live mode (AF) .........................131

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Live mode (AF) .........................131Manual focusing .................87, 138

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Manual focusing .................87, 138Metering timer...........................130

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Metering timer...........................130Possible shots ..........................125

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Possible shots ..........................125Quick Control............................128www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Quick Control............................128Quick mode (AF) ......................136www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Quick mode (AF) ......................136

Metering timer ...................... 130, 161

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMetering timer ...................... 130, 161MF (Manual focusing)............. 87, 138

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMF (Manual focusing)............. 87, 138Microphone................................... 142

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMicrophone................................... 142Miniature effect............................. 232

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMiniature effect............................. 232Mirror lockup......................... 122, 255

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mirror lockup......................... 122, 255Mode Dial ....................................... 22

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mode Dial ....................................... 22Monochrome .................... 65, 82, 114

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Monochrome .................... 65, 82, 114

324

Index

My Menu.......................................258

NNeutral ............................................82Night Portrait...................................63Night scene...............................60, 63No. ................................................170Noise reduction

High ISO speed ........................254Long exposures........................253

Nomenclature .................................18Non-Canon flash units ..................264Normal (Image-recording quality) ...76NTSC....................................150, 272

OONE SHOT (One-Shot AF).............83

PP (Program AE) ..............................74PAL .......................................150, 272Paper settings (printing)................238Partial metering.............................102Peripheral illumination correction ......................................110Personal white balance.................118PictBridge .....................................235Picture Style....................81, 112, 115Pixels ..............................................76Playback .................................71, 201Portrait ......................................59, 81Possible shots...................33, 76, 125Power

Auto power off ..........................167Battery check..............................33Household power .....................260Possible shots ..............33, 76, 125Recharge....................................26

Predictive (AI Servo).......................84Pressing completely........................40

Pressing halfway ............................ 40Printing ......................................... 235

Layout ...................................... 239Paper settings.......................... 238Print Order (DPOF).................. 245Printing effects ......................... 240Tilt correction ........................... 243Trimming .................................. 243

Program AE.................................... 74Program shift .................................. 75Protect (image erase-protection).. 222

QQ (Quick Control) ........... 41, 64, 208Quick mode (AF) .......................... 136

RRating........................................... 206Rating mark.................................. 206RAW......................................... 76, 78RAW+JPEG ............................. 76, 78Recharge........................................ 26Red-eye reduction.......................... 91Release shutter without card........ 166Remote control shooting .............. 261Remote switch.............................. 262Resize .......................................... 233Revert to default settings ............. 176Rotate (image) ............. 174, 205, 243

SSafety warnings............................ 297Saturation..................................... 113SD card .................................... 29, 45SDHC and SDXC cards ........... 29, 45Self-timer.................................. 64, 89Sensor cleaning ................... 184, 187Sepia (Monochrome).............. 65, 114Sharpness .................................... 113







www.devicemanuals.eu (Quick Control) ........... 41, 64, 208

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu (Quick Control) ........... 41, 64, 208Quick mode (AF) .......................... 136

www.devic

eman

uals.

euQuick mode (AF) .......................... 136

Rating........................................... 206

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rating........................................... 206


PAL .......................................150, 272

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

PAL .......................................150, 272Paper settings (printing)................238

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Paper settings (printing)................238Partial metering.............................102

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Partial metering.............................102

correction ......................................110

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

correction ......................................110Personal white balance.................118

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Personal white balance.................118PictBridge .....................................235www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

PictBridge .....................................235Picture Style....................81, 112, 115

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style....................81, 112, 115

Rating mark.................................. 206

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rating mark.................................. 206RAW......................................... 76, 78

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RAW......................................... 76, 78RAW+JPEG ............................. 76, 78

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RAW+JPEG ............................. 76, 78

325

Index

Shoot by ambience selection..........65Shoot by lighting or scene type.......68Shooting information display.........226Shooting mode................................22

A-DEP (Automatic Depth-of-Field AE)..101Av (Aperture-priority AE) ............96M (Manual exposure)..................99P (Program AE) ..........................74Tv (Shutter-priority AE)...............94A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......507 (Flash Off).............................55C (Creative Auto) .....................562 (Portrait) ................................593 (Landscape) .........................604 (Close-up)..............................615 (Sports).................................626 (Night Portrait) .......................63k (Movie shooting).................141

Shooting settings display ..........20, 47Shutter button .................................40Shutter sync. .................................182Shutter-priority AE...........................94Single image display.......................71Single shooting .......................58, 269Single-point AF ...............................85Slide show.....................................215Small (Image-recording quality) ....................................76, 234Soft focus ......................................232Software....................................3, 301Speaker.........................................212Sports..............................................62Spot metering................................102sRGB ............................................121Stopped-down aperture ..................98Strap ...............................................25System map..................................276

TTemperature warning............ 139, 163Tone priority.......................... 159, 254Toning effect (Monochrome)......... 114Toy camera effect ......................... 232Trimming (printing) ....................... 243Tripod socket .................................. 19Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................... 94

UUSB (Digital) terminal................... 236

VVari-Angle LCD monitor............ 31, 54Video snapshot............................. 153Video snapshot album.................. 153Video system................ 150, 221, 272View on TV ........................... 210, 218Viewfinder....................................... 21

Dioptric adjustment .................... 39Volume (Movie playback) ............. 213

WWB (White balance) ..................... 117White balance............................... 117

Bracketing ................................ 120Correction ................................ 119Custom..................................... 117Personal................................... 118

Wind filter ..................................... 161Wireless flash shooting ................ 189

Custom wireless shooting ........ 194Easy wireless shooting ............ 191





USB (Digital) terminal................... 236

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUSB (Digital) terminal................... 236

Vari-Angle LCD monitor............ 31, 54

www.devic

eman

uals.

euVari-Angle LCD monitor............ 31, 54Video snapshot............................. 153

www.devic

eman

uals.

euVideo snapshot............................. 153Video snapshot album.................. 153

www.devic

eman

uals.

euVideo snapshot album.................. 153


Shooting settings display ..........20, 47

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting settings display ..........20, 47Shutter button .................................40

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter button .................................40Shutter sync. .................................182

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter sync. .................................182Shutter-priority AE...........................94

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter-priority AE...........................94Single image display.......................71

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Single image display.......................71Single shooting .......................58, 269

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Single shooting .......................58, 269Single-point AF ...............................85

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Single-point AF ...............................85Slide show.....................................215www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Slide show.....................................215Small (Image-recording www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Small (Image-recording

Video system................ 150, 221, 272

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Video system................ 150, 221, 272View on TV ........................... 210, 218

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View on TV ........................... 210, 218

INS

TR

UC

TIO

N M

AN

UA

L

CEL-SR1UA211 © CANON INC. 201 PRINTED IN THE EU

This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of January 2011. For information on the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center.

CANON INC.30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

Europe, Africa & Middle East

CANON EUROPA N.V.PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands

For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support

The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.

The “Software Start Guide” and “Quick Reference Guide” are

provided at end of this manual.

INSTRUCTIONMANUAL

ENGLISH

2


eos 600d instruction manual en

Documents

digital camera

introductionthis camera

recorded images

liabilityafter shooting

advanced shooting

live view shooting

sdhc memory cards

sd memory cards